JP7525410B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes operational effects.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines that execute operational presentations are known (see Patent Document 1).
In this gaming machine, the first button effect (operation effect) and the second button effect (operation effect) are executed in a time-overlapping manner. During the period in which the first button effect and the second button effect are executed in a time-overlapping manner, if a button detection signal indicating that the operation button has been operated is input, the button effect with the higher expectation of a jackpot out of the first button effect and the second button effect is advanced.

JP 2015-195889 A

However, in conventional gaming machines, there is a risk that the presentation effect may be reduced.
In other words, in a conventional gaming machine, when the machine is configured to have a presentation means for executing an operation corresponding to a button effect, if the presentation means executes an operation corresponding to a button effect with a lower priority during a period in which multiple types of button effects are being executed at the same time, the operation corresponding to the button effect with a higher priority will not be executed, which may reduce the presentation effect.
An object of the present invention is to suppress a decrease in the presentation effect.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the gaming machine of the first invention comprises a presentation control means for executing an operation presentation, and a presentation means for executing an action corresponding to the operation presentation, and when multiple types of operation presentations are executed in a time-overlapping manner, the presentation means is capable of executing an action corresponding to an operation presentation having a higher priority among the multiple types of operation presentations, and during the execution of the operation presentation, an effective period during which the operation of the operation means is valid is set, and the multiple types of operation presentations include a first operation presentation and a second operation presentation having a longer effective period set than the first operation presentation, and the first operation presentation has a higher priority than the second operation presentation, and during a period during which the effective period of the second operation presentation and the effective period of the first operation presentation overlap each other in time, the presentation means is capable of executing an action corresponding to the first operation presentation and not executing an action corresponding to the second operation presentation, and the presentation means is a lamp, a speaker, or a movable body .
In the gaming machine according to the first invention, when a plurality of types of operation presentations are executed at the same time, the presentation means executes an action corresponding to the operation presentation having the highest priority among the plurality of types of operation presentations. This prevents the presentation means from failing to execute an action corresponding to the operation presentation having the highest priority among the plurality of types of operation presentations, and makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the presentation effect.
In particular, in the gaming machine of the first invention, it is possible to execute an operation by the presentation means by giving priority to the first operation presentation, which has a shorter effective period, over the second operation presentation, which has a longer effective period.
Here, the operation performance corresponds to button previews (dialogue preview, story preview, hidden button preview, continuous button preview) which will be described later. The performance control means corresponds to the performance control board 300 which will be described later. The performance means corresponds to the button lamp which will be described later. The priority level corresponds to the preview priority which will be described later. The operation means corresponds to the performance button 5b which will be described later. The valid period corresponds to the operation valid period which will be described later. The first operation performance corresponds to the dialogue preview and story preview which will be described later. The second operation performance corresponds to the continuous button preview which will be described later.

The present invention makes it possible to prevent a decline in the presentation effect.

1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the front of the game board, and diagrammatically illustrates parts particularly necessary for explanation. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a control system of a pachinko machine. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a firing condition detection circuit and a firing control circuit. FIG. A block diagram showing the configuration of the performance control board. 2 is an address map of a memory area used by the CPU 210. 13 is a flowchart showing a CPU initialization process. 13 is a flowchart showing a main loop process. 13 is a flowchart showing a save process at the time of power interruption. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a dynamic port output process. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance display device output process. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting-related process. 13 is a flowchart showing a switch management process. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal starting ball detection process. This is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process for Special Figure 1. This is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process for Special Chart 2. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern random number acquisition process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special game management process. 13 is a flowchart showing the special chart change waiting process. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during special chart change. A flowchart showing processing while a special chart is stopped. A flowchart showing the processing before the large prize opening is opened. 13 is a flowchart showing a special electric service opening/closing switching process. A flowchart showing the large prize opening control process. A flowchart showing the large prize opening closure validity process. A flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the large prize opening. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal game management process. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of waiting for a change in the map. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during normal map changes. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during normal map stop. This is a flowchart showing the processing before opening normal electric devices. 13 is a flowchart showing normal electric utility opening and closing switching processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature release control process. This is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature closure activation process. This is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of normal electric device opening. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance display device control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a sub-CPU initialization process. 13 is a flowchart showing an initial transfer process. 13 is a flowchart showing a sub timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a hold command receiving process. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead command receiving process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable command receiving process. 13 is a flowchart showing a stop command receiving process. 13 is a flowchart showing an opening command receiving process. A figure showing an example of a first line preview image im1. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the flow of dialogue previews. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a first-stage story image im3. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the flow of a story preview. A figure showing an example of a battle image im6. A diagram showing the flow of consecutive button announcements. A diagram showing the relationship between button preview types and preview priorities. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a transparency setting. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the operation of a button lamp. 13 is a flowchart showing a process when a button is pressed. 13 is a flowchart showing a button lamp setting process. A diagram showing the flow of presentation when continuous button preview and dialogue preview are combined. A figure showing an example of a display presentation when continuous button preview and dialogue preview are combined. This figure shows the flow of presentation when consecutive button announcements and hidden button announcements are combined.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1.

(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, an integrated door unit 4, and a game board unit 10.
The outer frame unit 2, the inner frame unit 3, and the integrated door unit 4 are fixed to one another via a hinge mechanism, which allows the inner frame unit 3 to be opened and closed relative to the outer frame unit 2. The integrated door unit 4 can be opened and closed relative to both the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2.
The outer frame unit 2 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (outer frame). The outer frame of the outer frame unit 2 is fixed to an island equipment of an amusement facility.
The inner frame unit 3 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is disposed inside the outer frame unit 2.
The integrated door unit 4 is formed in a rectangular door shape and has a transparent plate 4a disposed in the approximate center, a decorative portion 4b disposed around the transparent plate 4a, a receiving tray unit 5 disposed below the transparent plate 4a, and a launching handle unit 6 disposed to one side of the receiving tray unit 5.
The transparent plate 4a is formed in a flat plate shape from a transparent material such as resin or glass. The decorative portion 4b is formed from a transparent or translucent resin material and has a shape that bulges forward. At each corner on the upper side of the decorative portion 4b, a sound hole 4c is provided in which a speaker 22 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. Each sound hole 4c is provided with a plurality of sound holes that pass through the sound output by the speaker 22. In addition, a frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 3) is disposed on the decorative portion 4b. The frame lamp 20 is configured to include a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs) that are driven by dynamic lighting control.

The tray unit 5 is configured to include a tray 5a for receiving game balls (loan balls and prize balls) and various operating means that can be operated by the player.
In this embodiment, various operating means include a performance button 5b, a rotary selector 5c, a light intensity adjustment button (not shown), a volume adjustment button (not shown), a cross key button (not shown), etc.
The effect button 5b includes an operation section that can be pressed by the player, and a button switch 25 (see FIG. 3) that detects the operation section being pressed. The button switch 25 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 (see FIG. 3) every time the operation section is pressed. In this embodiment, a button lamp (not shown) is disposed inside the operation section of the effect button 5b. The button lamp includes a full-color LED. This allows the operation section of the effect button 5b to be illuminated in a predetermined color when the button lamp is illuminated.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called "jog dial") includes an operating section that can be rotated by the player, and a dial switch 26 (see FIG. 3) that detects the rotation of the operating section. The dial switch 26 outputs a detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the operating section is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60°).

The light intensity adjustment button includes two operation parts (a first operation part and a second operation part) that can be pressed by the player, and a light intensity adjustment switch 27 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing of each operation part. The light intensity adjustment switch 27 outputs a first detection signal to the performance control board 300 every time the first operation part is pressed, and outputs a second detection signal to the performance control board 300 every time the second operation part is pressed. Here, the light intensity adjustment button enables the operation of the two operation parts during the variable display of the special pattern (during the variable display described later), and disables the operation of the two operation parts during the stop display of the special pattern (during the stop display described later). As a result, in this embodiment, during the variable display of the special pattern (during the variable display described later), the adjustment of the light intensity of various lamps by the light intensity adjustment button is possible (permitted), and during the stop display of the special pattern (during the stop display described later), the adjustment of the light intensity of various lamps by the light intensity adjustment button is impossible (prohibited). In particular, with the light intensity adjustment button, a light intensity adjustment button lamp (not shown) located within each operation unit is lit during a period in which operation of the two operation units is valid, and the light intensity adjustment button lamp is turned off during a period in which operation of the two operation units is invalid.
The volume adjustment button includes two operation parts (a first operation part and a second operation part) that can be pressed by the player, and a volume adjustment switch 28 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing of each operation part. The volume adjustment switch 28 outputs a first detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the first operation part is pressed, and outputs a second detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the second operation part is pressed. Here, the volume adjustment button enables the operation of the two operation parts during the variable display of the special pattern (during the variable display described later), and disables the operation of the two operation parts during the stop display of the special pattern (during the stop display described later). As a result, in this embodiment, during the variable display of the special pattern (during the variable display described later), the adjustment of the volume of the speaker 22 by the volume adjustment button is possible (permitted), and during the stop display of the special pattern (during the stop display described later), the adjustment of the volume of the speaker 22 by the volume adjustment button is impossible (prohibited). In particular, with respect to the volume adjustment button, a volume adjustment button lamp (not shown) located within each operation unit is lit during a period in which operation of the two operation units is valid, and the volume adjustment button lamp is turned off during a period in which operation of the two operation units is invalid.
The cross key button includes four operation parts (up button, down button, left button, and right button) that can be pressed by the player, and a cross key switch 29 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing of each operation part. The cross key switch 29 outputs a first detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the up button is pressed, outputs a second detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the down button is pressed, outputs a third detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the left button is pressed, and outputs a fourth detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the right button is pressed.

A loan operation unit 7 is disposed on the upper surface of the tray unit 5. The loan operation unit 7 has a ball loan button 7a, a return button 7b, and a degree display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicatively connected to a CR unit 700 that can read and update information recorded on a prepaid card. When a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit 700, the remaining number of points of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 700 is displayed on the point display device 7c.
In addition, when the ball loan button 7a is operated while the prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit 700, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out into the tray 5a. At this time, the remaining number of points of the valuable medium recorded in the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls paid out, and the updated remaining number of points of the valuable medium is displayed on the point display device 7c.
Furthermore, when the return button 7b is operated while a prepaid card with remaining points of valuable media is inserted in the CR unit 700, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit 700.
Here, the prepaid card may be, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, or the like.

The firing handle unit 6 includes a handle base portion (not shown), a handle operating portion (not shown), and a firing stop button (not shown).
The handle base portion is attached to the front side of the integrated door unit 4. A bearing portion is provided on the front side of the handle base portion.
The handle operation unit is configured in a shape that allows it to be gripped by a player. A rotating shaft is provided on the back side of the handle operation unit. The handle operation unit is rotatably attached to the handle base by being supported by a bearing of the handle base.
The handle operation part can be rotated (displaced) between a predetermined initial position and a predetermined limit position. A biasing means (a spring in this embodiment) for biasing the handle operation part toward the initial position is disposed inside the launch handle unit 6. This allows the handle operation part to be disposed (displaced) at the initial position when the player is not rotating the handle operation part.
The firing stop button is provided on the side of the handle operation section and can be pressed by the player.

The firing handle unit 6 also includes a firing volume 411, a touch sensor 412, and a firing stop switch 413.
The firing volume 411 is composed of a variable resistor. The firing volume 411 detects the amount of rotation of the handle operation unit (the angle at which the handle operation unit is rotated). Specifically, the firing volume 411 includes a rotation shaft and a resistor whose resistance value changes according to the amount of rotation of the rotation shaft (rotation angle). The rotation shaft of the firing volume 411 is fixed coaxially to the rotation shaft of the handle operation unit. As a result, the rotation shaft of the firing volume 411 rotates according to the rotation operation of the handle operation unit, and the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes according to the amount of rotation of the handle operation unit.
The firing volume 411 is electrically connected to the operation detection unit 421 (see FIG. 4 ). The operation detection unit 421 detects the rotation operation (rotation operation amount) of the handle operation unit based on a change in the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411.
The touch sensor 412 detects the touch (grasping) of the handle operation unit by the player based on the change in capacitance. When the touch sensor 412 detects the touch of the player to the handle operation unit, it outputs a touch signal to the launch enabling condition detection unit 422 (see FIG. 4) (the touch signal is at a high level). On the other hand, when the touch sensor 412 does not detect the touch of the player to the handle operation unit, it stops outputting the touch signal to the launch enabling condition detection unit 422 (the touch signal is at a low level).
The launch stop switch 413 detects the pressing of the launch stop button. When the launch stop switch 413 does not detect the pressing of the launch stop button, it outputs a launch stop signal to the launch enabling condition detection unit 422 (sets the launch stop signal to a high level). On the other hand, when the launch stop switch 413 detects the pressing of the launch stop button, it stops outputting the launch stop signal to the launch enabling condition detection unit 422 (sets the launch stop signal to a low level).

(Configuration of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 shows the front of the game board, and is a schematic diagram showing parts particularly necessary for explanation.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inside of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3. As a result, the game board unit 10 is disposed on the rear side of the integrated door unit 4. The player can view the game board 11 (play area 30) described later through the transparent plate 4a. In this embodiment, the game area 30 described later is configured between the rear side of the transparent plate 4a and the front side of the game board 11.
As shown in Figure 2, the game board unit 10 comprises a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various presentation devices (main image display device 31, sub-image display device 32, movable body unit, etc.) attached to the set board.

The set plate is formed in a box shape with an open front side, and an opening formed as a through hole is provided in the approximate center of the rear plate of the set plate.
The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set plate. The game board 11 is made of resin and formed into a flat plate. An opening (not shown) consisting of a through hole is provided in the approximate center of the game board 11. The player can view the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set plate.
A game area 30 is formed around the opening on the front side of the game board 11, through which game balls flow down when shot out in response to the rotation of the launch handle unit 6. In the game area 30, a left path formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right path formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 are configured as paths through which the game balls flow down.
Furthermore, a board lamp 21 (see FIG. 3) is provided in the play area 30 of the game board 11. The board lamp 21 includes a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs) that are driven by dynamic lighting control.

The main image display device 31 is attached to the rear side of the set board and is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display.
The main image display device 31 includes a display screen 31a capable of displaying various types of performance images (moving images and still images).
The display screen 31a can be configured to have three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 (not shown) in which a first performance pattern z1 (not shown) is displayed, and one second performance pattern display area a4 (not shown) in which a second performance pattern z2 (not shown) is displayed.
The first performance symbol z1 is composed of identification information (symbols) such as numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc. In each of the first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to perform a variable display and a stationary display of the first performance symbol z1. The second performance symbol z2 is composed of color bars. In the second performance symbol display area a4, it is possible to perform a variable display and a stationary display of the second performance symbol z2.

The changing display of the performance patterns z1 and z2 refers to a display in which the first performance pattern z1 is moved (scrolled) in each of the first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3, and the type of the second performance pattern z2 displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 is changed (the color represented by the color bar is changed sequentially).
The stopped display of the performance patterns z1 and z2 refers to a display in which one type of first performance pattern z1 is stopped at the lottery result display position of each of the first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3, and one type of second performance pattern z2 is displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 (the color bar shows a specified color).
The result of the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery) is displayed based on the combination of the first performance pattern z1 displayed in a stopped state in the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 and the second performance pattern z2 displayed in a stopped state in the second performance pattern display area a4.
In addition, the display screen 31a can be configured with reserved symbol display areas b1, b2 (not shown) in which a reserved symbol h (not shown) is displayed.
The reserved symbol display area b1 displays reserved symbols h corresponding to game information during notification display (variable display and stop display of special symbols). The reserved symbol display area b2 displays reserved symbols h corresponding to game information for which notification display is pending.

The sub-image display device 32 is disposed at a position on the front side of the main image display device 31 .
The sub-image display device 32 is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display, a CRT display, etc. The sub-image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying a performance image.
The sub-image display device 32 can be displaced (moved) in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub-image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including an origin position (see FIG. 2) and a performance position (not shown) below the origin position.
The sub-image display device 32 disposed (displaced) at the origin position is disposed above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub-image display device 32 disposed (displaced) at the performance position is disposed in front of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and covers a part of the display screen 31a.

A first starting opening 51 is provided below the display screen 31a in the game area 30. The first starting opening 51 is an entry opening (a so-called "navel") that opens upward, and game balls can enter at any time. The first starting opening 51 allows game balls flowing down the left path to enter (game balls flowing down the right path cannot enter).
A special symbol 1 start port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the first start port 51. The special symbol 1 start port switch 101 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the first start port 51 (entry of a game ball into the first start port 51). The main control board 200 executes a first special symbol lottery in response to input of a detection signal from the special symbol 1 start port switch 101.

To the left of the first starting opening 51 in the game area 30, there are provided an upper left other winning opening 55, a center left other winning opening 56, and a lower left other winning opening 57. Each of the other winning openings 55-57 is an entry opening that opens upward and allows game balls to enter at all times. Each of the other winning openings 55-57 allows game balls that flow down the left path to enter (game balls that flow down the right path cannot enter).
A left winning hole switch 106 (see FIG. 3) is disposed on the game board 11. The left winning hole switch 106 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the upper left other winning hole 55 (entry of a game ball into the upper left other winning hole 55), a game ball that has entered the center left other winning hole 56 (entry of a game ball into the center left other winning hole 56), and a game ball that has entered the lower left other winning hole 57 (entry of a game ball into the lower left other winning hole 57). In response to the input of the detection signal from the left winning hole switch 106, the main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to perform a payout operation of the prize ball.

A start gate 41 is provided to the right of the display screen 31a in the game area 30. The start gate 41 is formed so that game balls can always pass through it. The start gate 41 allows game balls flowing down the right path to pass through (but does not allow game balls flowing down the left path to pass through).
A gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the start gate 41. The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a gaming ball passing through the start gate 41 (passage of the start gate 41 by a gaming ball). In response to input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the main control board 200 executes a normal symbol lottery.

A large prize opening 53 is provided below the start gate 41 in the game area 30. The large prize opening 53 is provided with a special electric device (special electric device) 53a (so-called "attacker") that can be displaced between a closed state that makes it impossible for game balls to enter the large prize opening 53 and an open state that allows game balls to enter the large prize opening 53.
The special electric device 53a is opened and closed by a special electric device solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). Normally, the special electric device 53a is closed and the big prize opening 53 is not capable of receiving game balls, but when the first or second special symbol lottery is won and a big win game state is generated, the special electric device 53a is opened and the game balls can enter. The big prize opening 53 is capable of receiving game balls that flow down the right path (but not game balls that flow down the left path).
A count switch 103 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the large prize opening 53. The count switch 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the large prize opening 53 (entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 53). In response to the input of the detection signal from the count switch 103, the main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a payout operation of the prize ball.

A second starting hole 52 is provided below the big winning hole 53 in the game area 30. The second starting hole 52 is provided with a normal electric device (normal electric device) 52a (so-called "electric tulip") that can be displaced between a closed state that makes it impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 and an open state that makes it possible for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 52.
The normal electric role 52a is opened and closed by a normal electric role solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). The second starting port 52 is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter, but when the normal symbol lottery is won, the normal electric role 52a is opened so that the game ball can enter. The second starting port 52 allows the game ball flowing down the right path to enter (but does not allow the game ball flowing down the left path to enter).
A special symbol 2 start port switch 102 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the second start port 52. The special symbol 2 start port switch 102 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the second start port 52 (entry of a game ball into the second start port 52). The main control board 200 executes a second special symbol lottery in response to input of the detection signal from the special symbol 2 start port switch 102.

A right other winning opening 54 is provided below the second starting opening 52 in the game area 30. The right other winning opening 54 is an entry opening that opens upward and allows game balls to enter at all times. The right other winning opening 54 allows game balls that flow down the right path to enter (game balls that flow down the left path cannot enter).
A right winning port switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the right other winning port 54. The right winning port switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the right other winning port 54 (entry of a game ball into the right other winning port 54). In response to input of the detection signal from the right winning port switch 105, the main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a payout operation of the prize balls.

At the lowest position in the game area 30, an outlet 58 is provided for discharging game balls that do not enter (win) any of the winning holes 51 to 57.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which game balls discharged from the game area 30 pass. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3. The pachinko machine 1 is configured so that all game balls shot into the game area 30 (all game balls discharged from the game area 30) pass through the discharge path. That is, the game balls shot into the game area 30 are discharged from the game area 30 by entering any of the winning holes 51 to 57 or by passing through the outlet 58, and flow into the discharge path.
Specifically, the game balls entering the winning holes 51 to 57 are detected by the switches 101 to 103, 105, and 106 disposed in the winning holes, and then guided to the discharge path. Also, the game balls discharged from the outlet 58 are guided to the discharge path.
An out switch 109 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the inner frame unit 3. The out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the discharge path (a game ball discharged from the game area 30). As a result, all game balls discharged from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109.
Furthermore, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game balls to each of the winning holes 51 to 57 and the starting gate 41.

A main display device 60 is disposed on the game board 11. The main display device 60 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured of a light-emitting element (in this embodiment, an LED).
The main display device 60 displays information related to the game.
The main display device 60 is composed of a special chart 1 display device, a special chart 2 display device, a normal chart display device, a special chart 1 reserve display device, a special chart 2 reserve display device, a normal chart reserve display device, a round display device, a right-hand hit display device, a special chance display device, and a time-saving display device.
Specifically, the main display device 60 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32).
In the main display device 60, LED1 to LED8 constitute the special chart 1 display device, LED7 to LED16 constitute the special chart 2 display device, LEDs 17 and 18 constitute the normal chart display device, LEDs 19 to LED23 constitute the round display device, LED 24 constitutes the right-hit display device, LEDs 25 and 26 constitute the special chart 1 reserve display device, LEDs 27 and 28 constitute the special chart 2 reserve display device, LEDs 29 and 30 constitute the normal chart reserve display device, LED 31 constitutes the special bonus display device, and LED 32 constitutes the time-saving display device.

The special symbol 1 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the first special symbol consisting of numbers, patterns, etc. Then, the special symbol 1 display device displays the result of the first special symbol lottery by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
The special symbol 2 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the second special symbol consisting of numbers, patterns, etc. Then, the special symbol 2 display device displays the result of the second special symbol lottery by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
Here, the display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) on the special pattern display device and the display of the performance patterns z1, z2 in the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4 correspond to the time when the varying display starts, the time when the stopped display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern, respectively.
Then, when the first special pattern (stopping pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 1 display device becomes a specific pattern (jackpot pattern), or when the second special pattern (stopping pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 2 display device becomes a specific pattern (jackpot pattern), a jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is created.

The normal symbol display device is capable of displaying the variation and stopping of normal symbols, which are numbers, symbols, etc. The normal symbol display device then displays the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed. When the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device becomes a specific symbol (a normal symbol winning symbol), a normal symbol winning game state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player, is created.

The special pattern 1 pending display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the first special pattern lottery is pending (special pattern 1 pending number).
The special pattern 2 reserved display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery is reserved (special pattern 2 reserved number).
The regular symbol pending display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery is pending (regular symbol pending number).
The round display device displays the number of rounds of play executed during the jackpot game state (type of jackpot game state).
The right-hand shot display device displays the path (left side path or right side path) along which the game ball should be shot.
The probability variation display device displays the game status when the power is restored (whether a special chart high probability state is occurring or a special chart low probability state is occurring).
The time-saving display device displays the current game status (time-saving control being executed or stopped).

In addition, one or more movable body units (not shown) are provided in the pachinko machine 1. In this embodiment, one or more movable body units are provided in the integrated door unit 4, and one or more movable body units are provided in the game board unit 10.
Each movable body unit of the integrated door unit 4 is disposed on the front side of the decorative portion 4b, on the upper surface of the tray unit 5, etc., and is capable of performing predetermined performance operations.
Each movable body unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set board. Specifically, each movable body unit is disposed in the space between the game board 11 and the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a) (hereinafter referred to as the "presentation space"). Each movable body unit is capable of performing a predetermined presentation action in the presentation space.
Each movable body unit includes a performance member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 24 (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 3) is used as the drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. Note that a solenoid may be used as the drive source.
The performance member can be displaced in a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the performance member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and a performance position. The performance member is driven (displaced) by a motor 23.

The position detection sensor 24 is composed of a photo sensor or the like. The position detection sensor 24 detects the position of the performance member. Specifically, the position detection sensor 24 includes a light-projecting unit and a light-receiving unit that receives the light projected from the light-projecting unit. The position detection sensor 24 outputs a detection signal to the performance control board 300 in response to the light-receiving unit receiving (detecting) the light projected from the light-projecting unit. On the other hand, the position detection sensor 24 stops outputting the detection signal to the performance control board 300 when the light-receiving unit does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light-projecting unit.
Also, a shielding plate is provided at a predetermined position of the performance member. Then, when the performance member is placed in the initial position, the shielding plate is placed between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the position detection sensor 24, and light is blocked from entering the light receiving portion. As a result, when the performance member is placed in the initial position, the output of a detection signal from the position detection sensor 24 to the performance control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the performance member is not placed in the initial position, a detection signal is output from the position detection sensor 24 to the performance control board 300.
This makes it possible for the performance control board 300 to detect whether or not the performance component is placed in the initial position depending on the input status of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 24.

The pachinko machine 1 is also provided with detection sensors for detecting various abnormal conditions.
In this embodiment, a glass frame opening sensor 107, an inner frame opening sensor 108, a vibration detection sensor 113, a radio wave detection sensor 114, a magnetic detection sensor 115, and the like are provided as detection sensors.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects the opening of the integrated door unit 4 relative to the inner frame unit 3. Then, the glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the dispensing control board 400 in response to the opening of the integrated door unit 4 relative to the inner frame unit 3.
The inner frame opening sensor 108 detects the opening of the inner frame unit 3 relative to the outer frame unit 2. Then, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the dispensing control board 400 in response to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 relative to the outer frame unit 2.

The vibration detection sensor 113 detects vibrations of the game board 11. In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is disposed on the game board 11. Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of vibrations of the game board 11.
The radio wave detection sensors 114 detect radio waves generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, two radio wave detection sensors 114 are provided on the game board 11. Each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a radio wave.
The magnetic detection sensor 115 detects magnetism generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is provided in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). In addition, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided in the game board 11. Then, the magnetic detection sensor 115 provided in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the detection of magnetism. In addition, each magnetic detection sensor 115 provided on the game board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of magnetism.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210.
The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with multiple control boards, such as a main control board 200, a performance control board 300, a payout control board 400, a power supply board 600 that supplies power (electricity) to each of the control boards 200, 300, 400, etc., a driver board 330, a sub-connection board 340, etc.
The control boards 200, 300, 400, and 600 are independent (separate) circuit boards, and are housed in individual board cases.
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10. Specifically, the main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11.
The dispensing control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the dispensing control board 400 is attached to the rear side of the inner frame provided in the inner frame unit 3.

(Configuration of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be described.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 is composed of a one-chip microcomputer, a clock generating circuit 202, a random number generating circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, a sink driver 240, and source drivers 250a, 250b, etc.
The one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, etc.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a memory area used by the CPU 210. As shown in Fig. 6, the memory area used by the CPU 210 is configured to include a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230.
Here, in FIG. 6, addresses for specifying memory areas are shown in hexadecimal numbers ("H" indicates that the number is hexadecimal).

The ROM 220 (the memory area of the ROM 220) is configured to include a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and a non-used area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 is configured to include a program area, an unused area, and a data area. The program area stores a program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game. The data area stores data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game. Note that the used area m1 may be configured without including the unused area.

The unused area m2 includes a program area and a data area.
The program area stores a program (program code) for executing processing related to tests defined by the gaming machine rules, and a program (program code) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (specifically, calculating the base ratio). The data area stores data (program data) for executing processing related to tests defined by the gaming machine rules, and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
In addition to the used area m1 and unused area m2, the ROM 220 is also provided with an unused area, a ROM comment area, a program management area, and the like.
The ROM comment area stores arbitrary data such as the title and version of a program, etc. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
In addition, an unused area m3 of a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area m1 and the unused area m2 in the ROM 220. This clarifies the boundary between the used area m1 and the unused area m2.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) is configured to include a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and a non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The usage area M1 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. Meanwhile, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. Note that the use area M1 may be configured without including an unused area.
Specifically, the work area is composed of a set value area, a gaming machine status flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error-related area, a normal game-related area 1, and a normal game-related area 2.
The set value area stores a set value. The gaming machine status flag area stores a gaming machine status flag. The checksum area stores a checksum. The backup flag area stores a backup flag. The error-related area stores information related to an error. The normal game-related area 1 stores a subcommand pointer, etc. The normal game-related area 2 stores input/output data in the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), lottery results, flags for managing the game status, etc. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 includes an area (a game information storage area described later) for storing game information acquired upon input of a detection signal from each of the special figure 1 start port switch 101, the special figure 2 start port switch 102, and the gate switch 104.

The non-used area M2 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program stored in unused area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined in the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of a program stored in unused area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined in the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206).
Specifically, the work area includes a performance display related area, which is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
Furthermore, an unused area M3 of a certain number of bytes (16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area M1 and the unused area M2 in the RAM 230. This clarifies the boundary between the used area M1 and the unused area M2.

In this embodiment, in processing based on a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1, it is permitted to refer to data stored in the non-use area M2.
On the other hand, data stored in non-use area M2 is prohibited from being rewritten (changed) by processing based on a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in use area m1.
In addition, in processing based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests defined in the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), it is permitted to refer to data stored in the used area M1.
On the other hand, data stored in the use area M1 is prohibited from being rewritten (changed) by processing based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests specified in the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206).
The game on the pachinko machine 1 can proceed (be completed) according to a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the usage area m1.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 MHz in this embodiment), and outputs this clock to both the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203 .
The random number generating circuit 203 is configured to include a first loop counter which generates a winning random number for a normal pattern lottery, a second loop counter which generates a jackpot random number for a first special pattern lottery, a third loop counter which generates a jackpot random number for a second special pattern lottery, and a fourth loop counter which generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter generates a winning random number for the normal symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generating circuit 202. In this embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter generates a jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generating circuit 202. In this embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).

The third loop counter generates a jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generating circuit 202. In this embodiment, the third loop counter value is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The fourth loop counter generates reach group random numbers by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 10006) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (once per 32 divisions of the clock frequency). In this embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s]/12 [MHz]=2.666 [μs]).

The input port 204 is configured to include a plurality of input ports (in this embodiment, input port 0 to input port 3).
Input port 0 receives a detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107, a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108, a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113, a detection signal from one of the radio wave detection sensors 114, a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 115, etc.
To the input port 1, a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, a handle detection signal from the launch enabling condition detection unit 422, and the like are input.
Input port 2 receives detection signals from the count switch 103, the right prize slot switch 105, the left prize slot switch 106, the out switch 109, and the other radio wave detection sensor 114.
The input port 3 receives a detection signal from the special diagram 1 start port switch 101, a detection signal from the special diagram 2 start port switch 102, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, etc.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception memory area corresponding to each switch/sensor (detection signal). In the reception memory area corresponding to each switch/sensor, 1-bit data is set that indicates the reception state of the detection signal from the switch/sensor.
Specifically, the receiving memory area corresponding to each switch/sensor is set to "1" when a detection signal is input from that switch/sensor (high level), and is set to "0" when no detection signal is input from that switch/sensor (low level).

The output port 205 is configured to include a plurality of output ports (in this embodiment, output port 0 to output port 4).
The output port 0 outputs data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60. The data signals output from the output port 0 are then input to the source driver 250a.
The output port 1 outputs common signals ("COM0" to "COM3") for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, a launch permission signal for detecting launch conditions described below, etc. The common signals output from the output port 1 are input to the sink driver 240.
The output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450.
The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the operation of the normal electric role solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the operation of the special electric role solenoid 65, etc.
The output port 4 outputs data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206. The data signals output from the output port 4 are then input to the source driver 250b.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a command output port 1 and a command output port 2. The CPU 210 transmits a control command (sub-command) from the command output port 1 to the performance control board 300, and transmits a control command (payout command) from the command output port 2 to the payout control board 400.
Each of the command output ports 1 and 2 has a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown).
The transmission data register outputs the control command input based on a subcommand transmission process (step S2-4) described later to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is made up of a plurality of registers and is capable of storing a plurality of control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the order in which they were input.
The transmitting shift register performs parallel-to-serial conversion on the control commands input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits them as serial data to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured with a light-emitting element (in this embodiment, an LED). Note that the performance display device 206 is arranged on the rear side of the game board 11, so that it cannot be seen by the player.
As described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the following states of the gaming machine (hereinafter, "gaming machine state") are defined: a playable state, a setting change state, a setting check state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state. Then, the information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes according to the gaming machine state that has occurred.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include four (four-digit) display sections (not shown). Each display section is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display section is composed of a seven-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot segment LED capable of displaying dots such as decimal points.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED 33 to LED 64). In the performance display device 206, LED 33 to LED 40 are a display section for the first digit, LED 41 to LED 48 are a display section for the second digit, LED 49 to LED 56 are a display section for the third digit, and LED 57 to LED 64 are a display section for the fourth digit.

During the playable state, the game can proceed. During the playable state, the performance display device 206 displays the base ratio.
In this embodiment, while a playable state occurs, the performance display device 206 alternately displays a first base ratio and a second base ratio at predetermined time intervals (5.0 [s] in this embodiment).
The "first base ratio" is the base ratio for the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the present time).
The "second base ratio" is the base ratio of the previous interval (the final base ratio calculated for the previous interval).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top two digits display information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio), and the bottom two digits display a number indicating the base ratio (percentage).

When the setting change state occurs, the setting values can be changed. During the setting change state, the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top three digits display information indicating that a setting change state is occurring (specifically, the top digit displays "r", the second top digit displays "n.", and the third top digit displays "-"), and the lowest digit displays a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area.
During the setting confirmation state, it becomes possible to confirm the setting values. During the setting confirmation state, the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top three digits display information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring (specifically, the top digit displays "r", the second top digit displays "n.", and the top digit displays no display), and the lowest digit displays a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area.

During the occurrence of a game stop state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), it is impossible to continue playing the game. During the occurrence of a game stop state, an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top three digits display information indicating that a game stop state is occurring (specifically, the top digit displays "E", the second top digit displays "r.", and the top 3 digit displays nothing), and the lowest digit displays a number indicating an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred (setting abnormality state, RAM abnormality state, or backup abnormality state).

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. That is, the RAM clear switch 207 includes an operation portion that can be pressed. When the operation portion is pressed, the RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to the input port 1.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. That is, the setting key switch 208 is configured to include an operation unit with a keyhole. The operation unit is unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole, and it becomes possible to rotate (switch) the operation unit from the OFF state to the ON state. When the operation unit is in the ON state, the setting key switch 208 outputs a detection signal to the input port 1.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of common signals to each of the display devices 60 and 206 in response to the common signals (“COM 0 ” to “COM 3 ”) output from the output port 1 .
The source driver 250a controls the output of data signals to the main display device 60 in response to the data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") output from output port 0.
The source driver 250 b controls the output of data signals to the performance display device 206 in response to the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4 .
The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a source driver 250a corresponding to the main display device 60 and a source driver 250b corresponding to the performance display device 206. The application of the power supply voltage Vcc to the data signal lines is controlled separately for the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, a common sink driver 240 is provided for the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206. The grounding of the common signal line is controlled collectively by the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.
This eliminates the need to provide sink drivers 240 corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and as a result, it eliminates the need to provide output ports (output ports for outputting common signals) corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of components required to control the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and it is no longer necessary for the main control board 200 (CPU 210) to generate common signals corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, making it possible to reduce the control load for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.

Furthermore, the main control board 200 is configured to include a test signal output circuit (not shown).
In a test signal output process (step S4-24) described later, the CPU 210 generates test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, time-saving control execution state, probability state of special symbol selection, etc.) and stores the generated test signal in a port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from a specified output port. The test signal output from the specified output port is then input to an interface board of a test computer (not shown) via a test signal output circuit.
In addition, in the main control board 200, detection signals from the special drawing 1 start port switch 101, the special drawing 2 start port switch 102, the gate switch 104, the count switch 103, the right winning port switch 105, the left winning port switch 106, the out switch 109, etc. are input to the input port 204 and input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.
Furthermore, in the main control board 200, control signals for controlling the operation of each solenoid (normal electric feature solenoid 64, special electric feature solenoid 65, etc.) output from output port 3 are input to each solenoid 64, 65, and are also input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.

(Configuration of the dispensing control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the dispensing control board 400 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the firing condition detection circuit and the firing control circuit.
The payout control board 400 controls the launch of game balls into the game area 30 and the payout of the game balls.
The dispensing control board 400 is configured to include a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, etc.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation (prize ball payout operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control board 200. The payout control board 400 also controls the game ball payout operation (loan ball payout operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the ball loan instruction signal received from the CR unit 700.
In addition, the payout control board 400 controls the game ball launching operation by the game ball launching device 430 (launching solenoid 431) based on the resistance value (voltage value) input from the launch volume 411, the touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, the launch stop signal input from the launch stop switch 413, the launch permission signal input from the main control board 200, and the CR connection signal input from the CR unit 700.
The method of controlling the game ball launching operation by the payout control board 400 will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIG. 4, the payout control board 400 is configured to include a launch condition detection circuit 420 and a launch control circuit 425 as circuits for controlling the game ball payout operation.
The firing condition detection circuit 420 is a circuit that detects whether a firing condition, which will be described later, is satisfied.
The firing condition detection circuit 420 is configured to include an operation detection unit 421 , a firing enabling condition detection unit 422 , and a firing condition detection unit 423 .
The operation detection unit 421 is a circuit that detects the rotation operation (amount of rotation operation) of the handle operation unit.
The operation detection unit 421 includes an operational amplifier that controls the output of an operation detection signal (setting the operation detection signal to a high level or low level) in accordance with the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411 .
Specifically, in the firing handle unit 6, the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes according to the amount of rotation of the handle operating portion. The operation detection portion 421 detects the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411, and detects whether or not the handle operating portion is being rotated and the amount of rotation of the handle operating portion based on the detected resistance value (voltage value).
When the operation detection unit 421 detects a rotation operation of the handle operation unit, it generates an operation detection signal and outputs the generated operation detection signal to the launch enable condition detection unit 422 (sets the operation detection signal to a high level). On the other hand, when the operation detection unit 421 does not detect a rotation operation of the handle operation unit, it stops outputting the operation detection signal to the launch enable condition detection unit 422 (sets the operation detection signal to a low level).
In addition, when the operation detection unit 421 detects a rotational operation of the handle operating unit, it generates a firing intensity signal corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the handle operating unit (the resistance value of the firing volume 411), and outputs the generated firing intensity signal to the firing control circuit 425.

The launch enabling condition detection unit 422 is a circuit that detects the establishment of a launch enabling condition.
The launch condition detection unit 422 includes an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls the output/stop of a specified signal depending on the result of a logical AND operation of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the launch stop signal, and a transistor that switches the output/stop of the handle detection signal depending on the specified signal output from the AND gate IC.
The "launch enabling condition" is a condition related to the player's operation (the player's intention) among the multiple conditions that make up the launch conditions described below.
The conditions for enabling firing include (1) a condition based on the detection status of the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 (detection status of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit), (2) a condition based on the detection status of the touch sensor 412 (detection status of the player's contact with the handle operation unit), and (3) a condition based on the detection status of the firing stop switch 413 (detection status of the operation of pressing the firing stop button).
In this embodiment, the launch possible condition is met when all of the following conditions are met: (1) the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 detect a rotation operation of the handle operation unit, (2) the touch sensor 412 detects contact with the handle operation unit by the player, and (3) the firing stop switch 413 does not detect a press operation of the firing stop button. On the other hand, when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not met, the launch possible condition is not met.
Here, the conditions for enabling firing include (1) a condition based on the detection status of the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 (detection status of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit) and (2) a condition based on the detection status of the touch sensor 412 (detection status of the player's contact with the handle operation unit), and (3) a condition based on the detection status of the firing stop switch 413 (detection status of the operation of pressing the firing stop button) may not be included.
In other words, the launchable condition is met when both of the following conditions are met: (1) the launch volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 detect the rotational operation of the handle operation unit, and (2) the touch sensor 412 detects contact with the handle operation unit by the player. Alternatively, the launchable condition may not be met when at least one of the conditions (1) and (2) is not met.

Specifically, the launch possible condition detection unit 422 detects whether or not the launch possible condition is met based on the operation detection signal input from the operation detection unit 421, the touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, and the launch stop signal input from the launch stop switch 413.
At this time, the launch enabling condition detection unit 422 detects the establishment of the launch enabling condition when the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the launch stop signal are all input, whereas the establishment of the launch enabling condition is not detected when at least one of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the launch stop signal is not input.
When the launchable condition detection unit 422 detects that the launchable condition is met, it generates a handle detection signal and outputs the generated handle detection signal to each of the main control board 200 and the launch condition detection unit 423 (sets the handle detection signal to a high level). On the other hand, when the launchable condition detection unit 422 does not detect that the launchable condition is met, it stops outputting the handle detection signal to each of the main control board 200 and the launch condition detection unit 423 (sets the handle detection signal to a low level).

The firing condition detection unit 423 is a circuit that detects whether a firing condition is met.
The firing condition detection unit 423 includes an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls the output/stop of the firing signal depending on the result of the logical AND operation of the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal.
The "launch conditions" are conditions for executing the launch of a game ball (game ball launching operation) into the game area 30 by the game ball launching device 430 (launch solenoid 431).
In this embodiment, the launch condition is met when all of the following conditions are met: (1) the launch enable condition is met, (2) a launch permission signal is input from the main control board 200, and (3) a CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700. On the other hand, the launch condition is not met when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not met.
The "launch permission signal" is output from the main control board 200 to the launch condition detection unit 423 when a playable state is set, assuming that communication is possible between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 (the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected).
Here, during the period when the power is turned on to the main control board 200, regardless of the state of the gaming machine, the launch permission signal may be output from the main control board 200 to the launch condition detection unit 423. In other words, when communication between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is possible (when the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected), the launch permission signal may be output from the main control board 200 to the launch condition detection unit 423.
The "CR connection signal" is output from the CR unit 700 to the firing condition detection unit 423 when communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the dispensing control board 400 (when the CR unit 700 and the dispensing control board 400 are electrically connected).

Specifically, the launch condition detection unit 423 detects whether the launch conditions are met based on the handle detection signal input from the launch enable condition detection unit 422, the launch permission signal input from the main control board 200, and the CR connection signal input from the CR unit 700.
At this time, the firing condition detection unit 423 detects the establishment of the firing condition when the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal are all inputted, whereas the firing condition detection unit 423 does not detect the establishment of the firing condition when at least one of the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal is not inputted.
When the firing condition detection unit 423 detects that the firing condition is satisfied, it generates a firing signal and outputs the generated firing signal to the firing control circuit 425 (sets the firing signal to a high level). On the other hand, when the firing condition detection unit 423 does not detect that the firing condition is satisfied, it stops outputting the firing signal to the firing control circuit 425 (sets the firing signal to a low level).

The launch control circuit 425 is a circuit that controls the launch strength of the game balls by the game ball launcher 430 and the launch timing of the game balls by the game ball launcher 430. In other words, the launch control circuit 425 controls the output of a drive signal to the game ball launcher 430 (launch solenoid 431).
Specifically, the firing control circuit 425 includes a clock generating section (not shown), a firing timing control section (not shown), and a firing solenoid driving section (not shown).
The clock generating section outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency to the emission timing control section.
The firing timing control unit generates a pulse signal for controlling the firing timing based on the clock signal input from the clock generating unit, and outputs the generated pulse signal to the firing solenoid driving unit. At this time, the firing timing control unit generates the pulse signal so that the number of game balls fired per minute is a predetermined number (e.g., 100 [balls]).
The firing solenoid drive unit controls the output of a drive signal to the firing solenoid 431 based on a firing signal input from the firing condition detection unit 423, a pulse signal input from the firing timing control unit, and a firing intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421.
Specifically, when a launch signal is input from the launch condition detection unit 423, the launch solenoid drive unit, in response to a pulse signal input from the launch timing control unit, outputs a drive signal (drive current) corresponding to the launch intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421 to the launch solenoid 431. This causes the game ball to be launched with an intensity corresponding to the launch intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421.
On the other hand, when the launch signal is not input from the launch condition detection unit 423, the launch solenoid drive unit stops outputting the drive signal to the launch solenoid 431. This stops the launch of the game balls.

The game ball launching device 430 includes a striking hammer (not shown) and a launching solenoid 431 that drives the striking hammer. The launching solenoid 431 is a rotary solenoid. The striking hammer may be driven by another driving source such as a motor.
Game balls are supplied to the game ball launcher 430 from a ball feed unit (not shown). When a drive signal is input to the launch solenoid 431, the launch solenoid 431 is driven in response to the input drive signal, and the game ball is shot out by the hitting mallet. This causes the game ball to be launched into the game area 30.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, assuming that a playable state is set in the main control board 200 and that communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400, when the handle operation part is rotated (displaced from the initial position toward the limit position) by the player's contact without the firing stop button being pressed, the game ball firing operation by the game ball launcher 430 is started. Then, while the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 is being performed, the game ball is launched into the play area 30 with a strength according to the amount of rotation of the handle operation part.
Furthermore, when the launch stop button is pressed, the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped. That is, even if the handle operation unit is being rotated by contact with the player, when the launch stop button is pressed, the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped.
Furthermore, when the handle operation unit is returned to the initial position (when the handle operation unit is not being rotated), the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped. In other words, even if the player is in contact with the handle operation unit, when the handle operation unit is returned to the initial position, the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, while a state in which the launch conditions are met (hereinafter referred to as the "launch state") occurs, the output of a handle detection signal from the launch condition detection unit 422 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
In other words, during a state in which rotation operation of the handle operating unit is detected, contact with the handle operating unit is detected, and pressing of the launch stop button is not detected (launch possible state), the output of the handle detection signal from the launch condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
In this case, as long as the launch-enabled state is occurring, the output of a handle detection signal from the launch condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained, regardless of whether a launch permission signal is input from the main control board 200 to the launch condition detection circuit 420 (regardless of the gaming machine state set in the main control board 200).
Furthermore, as long as the firing possible state is occurring, the output of a handle detection signal from the firing condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained regardless of whether a CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700 to the firing condition detection circuit 420 (regardless of whether communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the dispensing control board 400).
As a result of the above, the main control board 200 is able to detect (grasp) whether or not a launch-enabled state is occurring, and it becomes possible to control the progress of the game, the content of the presentation, etc., depending on the occurrence status of the launch-enabled state.

In other words, when the main control board 200 detects that the handle detection signal has changed from a state where it is not input to a state where it is input (the handle detection signal has changed from a low level to a high level), it transmits a game status designation command to the performance control board 300, specifying the occurrence (start) of a launch-ready state.
On the other hand, when the main control board 200 detects that the handle detection signal has changed from an input state to an input state (the handle detection signal has changed from a high level to a low level), it sends a game status designation command to the performance control board 300, specifying the release (end) of the launch-ready state.
This enables the performance control board 300 to detect the occurrence of a launch-ready state by receiving a game status designation command that specifies the occurrence of a launch-ready state, and to detect the cancellation of the launch-ready state by receiving a game status designation command that specifies the cancellation of the launch-ready state.
The performance control board 300 is then able to change the content of the performance depending on whether or not a firing-ready state is occurring.

(Configuration of the performance control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the performance control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the performance control board.
The performance control board 300 controls the performances (display performances, sound performances, lamp performances, movable body performances, etc.) based on control commands received from the main control board 200.
As shown in FIG. 5, the performance control board 300 is configured to include a microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 301 and various external devices externally connected to the microcomputer 301.
In this embodiment, various external devices include a control ROM 302, a character generator read only memory (CGROM) 303, a dynamic random access memory (DRAM) 304, and the like.

The control ROM 302 stores a control program for controlling the operation of the microcomputer 301, various data required for executing the control program, etc. In particular, the control ROM 302 stores (memorizes) performance scenario data corresponding to each performance number, an animation table corresponding to each display performance number, a sound table corresponding to each sound performance number, a lamp control table corresponding to each lamp performance number, a movable body control table corresponding to each movable body performance number, various compressed lamp drive data, and various compressed motor drive data.
The "compressed lamp drive data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) the lamp drive data in a predetermined format. The "lamp drive data" is data for driving the various lamps 20, 21 (data specifying the luminance values of the lamps 20, 21 belonging to each system).
The "compressed motor drive data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) motor drive data in a predetermined format. The "motor drive data" is data for driving various motors 23 (data that specifies the output value of each motor 23).
In this embodiment, a NOR type flash memory (NOR type ROM) is used as the control ROM 302. Here, the control ROM 302 may be configured to use an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory).
The control ROM 302 is connected to the HOST interface 313 of the microcomputer 301 .

The CGROM 303 stores (memorizes) various types of compressed image data, various types of compressed audio data, and the like.
"Compressed image data" is data that has been compressed (encoded) into a specific format. "Image data (material data)" is data of an image (moving image or still image) that is used as the material for drawing processing.
The "compressed audio data" is audio data compressed (encoded) in a predetermined format. The "audio data" is audio data output from the various speakers 22.
In this embodiment, a NAND type flash memory (NAND type ROM) is used as the CGROM 303. Specifically, the CGROM 303 is configured of an SSD (Solid State Drive) that uses a NAND type flash memory as a storage unit.
The CGROM 303 is connected to a CG bus interface 314 of the microcomputer 301. The CG bus interface 314 is a connection interface conforming to the SATA (Serial AT Attachment) standard, whereby various data stored in the CGROM 303 is read out and transferred via SATA.

The DRAM 304 is provided with a preload area, into which various data (specifically, compressed image data, compressed audio data, etc.) stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred (preloaded).
The DRAM 304 is also provided with a drawing command buffer area, a sound command buffer area, a lamp command buffer area, and a motor command buffer area. In this embodiment, a double buffering method is adopted for the drawing command buffer area, and the DRAM 304 is provided with two drawing command buffer areas.
The two drawing command buffer areas are configured to be the same size. During a period in which one of the two drawing command buffer areas is designated as a construction area, the other drawing command buffer area is designated as a transfer area. In addition, for each drawing command buffer area, the designation as a construction area and the designation as a transfer area are alternated for each frame.
Then, for each drawing command buffer area, during the period designated as the construction area, a display list, which will be described later, is stored (generated and constructed) in that drawing command buffer area, and during the period designated as the transfer area, the display list stored in that drawing command buffer area is transferred to the VDP (specifically, the preloader circuit 319).
The DRAM 304 is connected to a DRAM interface 315 of the microcomputer 301 .

The microcomputer 301 is an LSI in which a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like are integrated.
The microcomputer 301 controls the performance operations of various performance means based on control commands received from the main control board 200.
The "various performance means" include various image display devices 31, 32, various speakers 22, various lamps 20, 21, and various motors 23 (various movable bodies). Therefore, the "performance actions by various performance means" include display of performance images by the various image display devices 31, 32, output of sound by the various speakers 22, driving (lighting) of the various lamps 20, 21, driving of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies), etc.
The microcomputer 301 includes internal devices such as a CPU 310, a CPU work memory 311, a CPU interface 312, a host interface 313, a CG bus interface 314, a DRAM interface 315, a VRAM 316, a serial communication controller 317, a transfer circuit 318, a preloader circuit 319, a display circuit 320, a graphics decoder circuit 321, a drawing circuit 322, and a sound controller 323, and these internal devices are bus-connected to a data bus 324.

The CPU 310 is connected to a HOST interface 313 via a CPU interface 312. The main control board 200 is also connected to the HOST interface 313, and control commands are input from the main control board 200. Furthermore, a data bus 324 is connected to the HOST interface 313.
This enables the CPU 310 to receive control commands (sub-commands) from the main control board 200 via the HOST interface 313 .
In addition, the CPU 310 is capable of communicating with internal devices such as a serial communication controller 317 , a preloader circuit 319 , a display circuit 320 , and a sound controller 323 via a HOST interface 313 and a data bus 324 .
In addition, the CPU 310 is capable of reading out various data (control programs, control data, etc.) stored in the control ROM 302 via a HOST interface 313 .
In addition, the CPU 310 is capable of reading out various data (compressed audio data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the HOST interface 313 , the data bus 324 , and the CG bus interface 314 .
Furthermore, the CPU 310 is capable of reading and writing data from and to the DRAM 304 via a HOST interface 313 , a data bus 324 , and a DRAM interface 315 .

The CPU 310 executes various calculation processes required to control the performance actions of the various performance means, control processes of internal devices in accordance with the various calculation processes, and the like.
At this time, the CPU 310 uses a CPU work memory (RAM) 311 and a DRAM 304 as a work area for various arithmetic processes, a buffer area for various arithmetic process data, a table data area, a buffer area for various input/output data, and the like.
That is, the CPU 310 selects the performance (performance number) to be executed based on the control command received from the main control board 200, and selects and sets performance scenario data corresponding to the selected performance number. Also, various command information (messages) are set in sequence according to the performance scenario data selected and set. Furthermore, various control data (animation table, sound table, lamp control table, movable body control table, etc.) are selected and set according to the set command information. Then, internal commands (drawing commands, sound commands, lamp commands, motor commands, etc.) for controlling various internal devices (VDP, sound controller 323, lamp controller 317a, motor controller 317b, etc.) are generated according to the various control data selected and set.

Specifically, the CPU 310 generates a display list in the drawing command buffer area designated as the construction area in accordance with the animation table.
A "display list" is a collection of drawing commands for one frame. That is, the drawing commands for one frame are described in a predetermined order in the display list. Then, in the VDP, processing based on each drawing command is executed in the order described in the display list, thereby generating drawing data for one frame.
The "drawing command" is information that specifies the contents of the drawing process (drawing control) to be executed by the VDP. In particular, the drawing command specifies the address of the memory area where the compressed image data used for drawing is stored (hereinafter referred to as the "image address"), the magnification (enlargement ratio/reduction ratio) when the image data is drawn, the coordinates (coordinates in the frame buffer area) at which the image data is drawn, the transmittance (transparency/transparency/transparency rate) when the image data is drawn, etc.
Furthermore, the CPU 310 generates sound commands in the sound command buffer area according to the sound table.
The “sound command” is information that specifies the content of the sound output process (sound output control) to be executed by the sound controller 323 .
Furthermore, the CPU 310 generates lamp commands in the lamp command buffer area according to the lamp control table.
The "lamp command" is information that specifies the content of the lamp drive process (lamp drive control) to be executed by the lamp controller 317a.
Furthermore, CPU 310 generates motor commands in a motor command buffer area according to the movable body control table.
The "motor command" is information that specifies the content of the motor drive process (motor drive control) to be executed by the motor controller 317b.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to a preload area of the DRAM 304 .
That is, while a NAND flash memory such as the CGROM 303 can easily have a large capacity, it has a slow data read speed compared to a NOR flash memory such as the control ROM 302. For this reason, if compressed audio data is directly read from the CGROM 303 (NAND flash memory) when the sound controller 323 executes an audio output process, there is a risk of a significant decrease in processing performance.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, before the sound output process is executed, the compressed sound data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the DRAM 304, which is a storage means having a faster data read speed than the CGROM 303. Then, by configuring the system so that the compressed sound data is read from the DRAM 304 when the sound output process is executed, a decrease in processing performance is prevented.

Specifically, when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) predetermined compressed audio data from among the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to a preload area of the DRAM 304. At this time, in this embodiment, all of the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304. Here, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which only a portion of the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304.
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, after the transfer of the above-mentioned predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to execute control of the output of audio from the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound controller 323). In other words, before the transfer of the above-mentioned predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes impossible to execute control of the output of audio from the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound controller 323).
After the transfer of the above-mentioned predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to control the display of the performance image (drawing process by the VDP) by the various image display devices 31, 32. In other words, before the transfer of the above-mentioned predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes impossible to control the display of the performance image by the various image display devices 31, 32 (drawing process by the VDP).
On the other hand, before the transfer of the above-mentioned predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to execute control of the driving (light emission) of the various lamps 20, 21 (lamp driving process by the lamp controller 317a).
Furthermore, before the transfer of the above-mentioned predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to execute control of the drive of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies) (motor drive processing by the motor controller 317b).

The transfer circuit 318 transfers various types of data between internal devices.
Specifically, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the display list stored in the drawing command buffer area designated as the transfer area to the preloader circuit 319. In addition, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 to the drawing circuit 322.
The transfer circuit 318 also transfers sound commands stored in the sound command buffer area to the sound controller 323. The transfer circuit 318 also transfers lamp commands stored in the lamp command buffer area to the lamp controller 317a. The transfer circuit 318 also transfers motor commands stored in the motor command buffer area to the motor controller 317b.

The VRAM 316 is provided with an image development area, in which image data (material data) developed (restored and decoded) by the graphics decoder circuit 321 is temporarily stored.
A frame buffer area is also provided in the VRAM 316. In this embodiment, a double buffering method is adopted for the frame buffer area, and the VRAM 316 is provided with two frame buffer areas.
The two frame buffer areas are configured to be the same size. While one of the two frame buffer areas is designated as a drawing area, the other frame buffer area is designated as an output area. Furthermore, for each frame buffer area, the designation as a drawing area and the designation as an output area are alternated for each frame.
Then, for each frame buffer area, during the period designated as the drawing area, one frame's worth of drawing data is stored (generated and drawn) in that frame buffer area, and during the period designated as the output area, a video signal is output based on the one frame's worth of drawing data stored in that frame buffer area.

In the microcomputer 301, a preloader circuit 319, a display circuit 320, a graphics decoder circuit 321, a drawing circuit 322, etc. function as a VDP (Video Display Processor).
The VDP controls the display of the effect image by the various image display devices 31, 32. Specifically, the VDP generates drawing data in response to receiving a display list (drawing commands) from the CPU 310, generates a video signal based on the generated drawing data, and outputs the generated video signal to the various image display devices 31, 32.
The preloader circuit 319 is capable of reading out various data (compressed image data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the CG bus interface 314 .
In particular, the preloader circuit 319 transfers (preloads) the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to a preload area of the DRAM 304 before the drawing process is executed by the drawing circuit 322 .
That is, as described above, a NAND flash memory such as the CGROM 303 can be easily increased in capacity, but has a slower data read speed, compared to a NOR flash memory such as the control ROM 302. For this reason, if compressed image data is directly read from the CGROM 303 (NAND flash memory) when the drawing circuit 322 executes the drawing process, there is a risk that the processing performance will be significantly degraded.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, before the drawing process is executed, the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the DRAM 304, which is a storage means having a faster data read speed than the CGROM 303. Then, by configuring the system so that the compressed image data is read from the DRAM 304 when the drawing process is executed, a decrease in processing performance is prevented.

Specifically, every time the preloader circuit 319 receives a display list, it transfers (preloads) one frame of compressed image data specified in the display list, from among the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303, to a preload area of the DRAM 304. At this time, the preloader circuit 319 rewrites the display list.
That is, in the display list generated by the CPU 310, an address specifying a storage area of the CGROM 303 is described as the image address included in each drawing command. Therefore, for each drawing command included in the display list, the preloader circuit 319 transfers the compressed image data stored in the storage area (storage area of the CGROM 303) specified by the image address included in the drawing command to a predetermined area of the DRAM 304, and then rewrites the image address included in the drawing command to an address specifying the storage area after transfer (the predetermined area of the DRAM 304). As a result, a new display list in which the image address has been rewritten is generated.
In this embodiment, the preloader circuit 319 is configured to transfer (preload) the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to a preload area of the DRAM 304. However, the preloader circuit 319 may be configured to transfer the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to a predetermined area (preload area) of the VRAM 316.
The display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 is transferred by the transfer circuit 318 to the drawing circuit 320 .

The drawing circuit 322 stores (generates and draws) one frame's worth of drawing data in the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area in accordance with the display list received from the preloader circuit 319 .
Specifically, each time the drawing circuit 320 receives a display list, it reads out one frame's worth of compressed image data specified in the display list from the DRAM 304. The one frame's worth of compressed image data read out from the DRAM 304 is restored (decoded) by the graphic decoder circuit 321 and stored (expanded) in an image expansion area of the VRAM 316. Then, the drawing circuit 320 uses the image data stored in the image expansion area to generate one frame's worth of drawing data in the frame buffer area specified as the drawing area.

The display circuit 320 generates a video signal based on one frame of drawing data stored (generated and drawn) in a frame buffer area specified as an output area, and outputs the generated video signal to various image display devices 31, 32. In this embodiment, a digital RGB signal is output as the video signal. Here, a configuration in which an LVDS (Low voltage differential signaling) signal is output as the video signal may also be used.
Specifically, the display circuit 320 is configured to include a data acquisition circuit (not shown), a scaler circuit (not shown), a color correction circuit (not shown), a ditherer circuit (not shown), a synchronization signal generation circuit (not shown), and the like.
The data acquisition circuit reads out the drawing data stored in the frame buffer area designated as the output area.
The scaler circuit is capable of performing scaling processing (enlargement and reduction processing) on the drawing data read out by the data acquisition circuit.
The color correction circuit is capable of performing color correction processing on the drawing data after processing by the scaler circuit.
The ditherer circuit is capable of performing dithering processing on the drawing data after processing by the color correction circuit.
Then, the drawing data processed by the dithering circuit is output as a video signal (digital RGB signal).
The synchronization signal generation circuit generates a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal (Vsync). The synchronization signal generation circuit then outputs the generated horizontal synchronization signal and vertical synchronization signal to the various image display devices 31 and 32. The synchronization signal generation circuit also outputs the generated vertical synchronization signal to the CPU 310.
In this embodiment, the display of the effect image (the display of the effect image based on one frame's worth of drawing data) in each of the image display devices 31, 32 is updated every 16.66 [ms]. Therefore, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs a vertical synchronization signal (set to high level) to the CPU 310 every 16.66 [ms].

The sound controller 323 controls the audio output from the various speakers 22 .
Specifically, the sound controller 323 generates an audio signal in response to receiving a sound command from the CPU 310 , and outputs the generated audio signal to the various speakers 22 .
The sound controller 323 includes an audio decoder circuit (not shown). In response to a sound command received from the CPU 310, the audio decoder circuit reads compressed audio data specified by the sound command from the DRAM 304. The audio decoder circuit also restores (decodes) the read compressed audio data. Then, based on the restored audio data, the audio signal is generated and output to the various speakers 22.

The serial communication controller 317 includes a lamp controller 317a and a motor controller 317b.
The lamp controller 317 a controls the driving (light emission) of the various lamps 20 and 21 .
Specifically, the lamp controller 317a generates lamp driving data in response to receiving a lamp command from the CPU 310, and outputs the generated lamp driving data together with a clock signal to the lamp drivers 332 and 342. At this time, the lamp driving data is output as serial data.
The lamp controller 317a includes a lamp decoder circuit (not shown). In response to receiving a lamp command from the CPU 310, the lamp decoder circuit reads out compressed lamp drive data specified in the lamp command from the control ROM 302. The lamp decoder circuit also restores (decodes) the read compressed lamp drive data. Then, based on the restored lamp drive data, the lamp controller 317a generates lamp drive data and outputs the generated lamp drive data to the lamp drivers 332 and 342.

The motor controller 317b controls the driving of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies).
Specifically, the motor controller 317b generates motor drive data in response to receiving a motor command from the CPU 310, and outputs the generated motor drive data together with a clock signal to the motor drivers 333 and 343. At this time, the motor drive data is output as serial data.
The motor controller 317b includes a motor sequencer circuit (not shown). In response to receiving a motor command from the CPU 310, the motor sequencer circuit reads out compressed motor drive data specified in the motor command from the control ROM 302. The motor sequencer circuit also restores (decodes) the read compressed motor drive data. Then, based on the restored motor drive data, the motor controller 317b generates motor drive data and outputs the generated motor drive data to the motor drivers 333 and 343.
In addition, information indicating the detection status of the various sensors 24 is input to the motor controller 317b from the driver board 330, and information indicating the detection status of each switch 25 to 29 and information indicating the detection status of the various sensors 24 are input from the sub-connection board 340.

(Method of controlling performance by performance control board 300)
Next, a method for controlling the performance using the performance control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 selects the effect (effect number) to be executed in response to a control command received from the main control board 200. Then, the CPU 310 sets the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected effect number and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data in the effect scenario setting area of the DRAM 304.
"Performance scenario data" is information that specifies the progress of a performance. Specifically, the performance scenario data has a plurality of process data registered in chronological order. That is, the performance scenario data has a plurality of process data and information that specifies the start time (start timing) of processing based on each process data registered therein.
Each process data includes one or more pieces of command information (messages). In particular, command information specifying the start of a sub-performance (display performance, sound performance, lamp performance, or movable body performance) (hereinafter, referred to as a "performance start command"), command information specifying the end of a sub-performance (display performance, sound performance, lamp performance, or movable body performance) (hereinafter, referred to as a "performance end command"), etc. are specified as command information.
The effect start command includes information specifying the sub-effect to be started (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect). Specifically, the effect start command includes information specifying the sub-effect number (display effect number, sound effect number, lamp effect number, or movable body effect number) of the sub-effect to be started.
The effect end command includes information specifying the sub-effect to be ended (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect). Specifically, the effect end command includes information specifying the sub-effect number (display effect number, sound effect number, lamp effect number, or movable body effect number) of the sub-effect to be ended.

Then, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the presentation based on the presentation scenario data set in the presentation scenario setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 updates the production scenario timer set in the production scenario setting area at a first predetermined period (in this embodiment, 1/30 [s]), and determines, based on the updated value of the production scenario timer, whether or not there is any process data whose start time has arrived among the process data registered in the production scenario data set in the production scenario setting area. If it determines that there is process data whose start time has arrived, it stores (memorizes) each piece of command information included in the process data in a buffer area corresponding to the command information.
At this time, command information regarding the display performance (such as a performance start command that specifies the start of the display performance, a performance end command that specifies the end of the display performance, etc.) is stored in a display command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information regarding sound performance (such as a performance start command that specifies the start of a sound performance, a performance end command that specifies the end of a sound performance, etc.) is stored in the sound command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information regarding the lamp performance (such as a performance start command that specifies the start of a lamp performance, a performance end command that specifies the end of a lamp performance, etc.) is stored in the lamp command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information regarding the movable body performance (such as a performance start command that specifies the start of the movable body performance, a performance end command that specifies the end of the movable body performance, etc.) is stored in the movable body command buffer area.

(Display performance control method)
Next, a method for controlling the display performance (display) by the performance control board 300 will be described.
An animation table corresponding to each display effect (each display effect number) is stored in the control ROM 302. The animation table corresponding to each display effect is associated with display priority information corresponding to the display effect (the image constituting the display effect).
The "display priority information" is information that specifies the display priority.
"Display priority" is information that specifies the display (drawing) priority order.
When multiple display effects (displays) are executed at the same time, the display on the display screen 31a (the effect image displayed on the display screen 31a) is configured based on the multiple display effects (images related to the multiple display effects). In this case, among the multiple display effects (multiple images) that configure the display (the effect image), the display effect (image) with the higher display priority is displayed with priority over the display effect (image) with the lower display priority. In other words, among the multiple display effects (multiple images) that configure the effect image, the higher the display priority of the display effect (image) is, the higher the display priority is displayed with priority.
In other words, among the multiple display effects (multiple images) constituting the effect image, the display effect (image) with a higher display priority is displayed closer to the player than the display effects (images) with a lower display priority. In other words, among the multiple display effects (multiple images) constituting the effect image, the higher the display priority of the display effect (image) is, the closer it is displayed to the player.
As a result, if there is an overlapping portion between a display performance (image) with a higher display priority and a display performance (image) with a lower display priority among the multiple display performances (multiple images) that make up the performance image, the display performance (image) with the higher display priority is displayed preferentially for that overlapping portion.

The CPU 310 (display control unit) periodically determines whether command information is stored in the display command buffer area, and when it determines that command information is stored in the display command buffer area, it analyzes each piece of command information stored in the display command buffer area and executes processing according to the analysis result.
At this time, if command information specifying the start of a display effect is stored in the display command buffer area, the animation table corresponding to the display effect number specified by the command information is read out from the animation tables stored in the control ROM 302. Then, the read animation table is set (stored and registered) in the animation table setting area of the DRAM 304.
As a result, the animation table stored in the control ROM 302 is copied into the animation table setting area. Note that it is possible to set a plurality of animation tables in the animation table setting area.

The "animation table" is information (various parameters for controlling the display of images) that specifies the progress of the display performance (display of performance images) by the various image display devices 31, 32. In other words, the animation table is information that specifies the movement of images.
Specifically, a predetermined number of frames of information are registered in chronological order in the animation table, and the display performance progresses by sequentially displaying images based on each frame of information in the predetermined number of frames of information registered in the animation table in the order in which they are registered.
Each frame information is a variety of parameters for controlling (executing and configuring) the display of one frame's worth of image. That is, each frame information is composed of information (image address information) specifying image data (compressed image data) used for drawing, information (display priority information) specifying the display priority of the image data (the display performance), information specifying the magnification (enlargement ratio/reduction ratio) when the image data is drawn (hereinafter referred to as "display magnification information"), information specifying the coordinates (coordinates in the frame buffer area) at which the image data is drawn (hereinafter referred to as "display coordinate information"), information specifying the transmittance (transparency/transparency/transparency) when the image data is drawn (hereinafter referred to as "transmittance information"), and the like.

Then, the CPU 310 controls the display of the effect image corresponding to each frame based on one or more animation tables set in the animation table setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 executes a command construction process, which will be described later, at a predetermined cycle.
In the command construction process, first, the sub-scenario timers corresponding to each animation data set in the display scenario setting area are updated, and then, a display list is constructed in the drawing command buffer area specified in the construction area based on all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area.
Specifically, for all animation tables set in the animation table setting area, frame information selected as a target for constructing a display list is obtained from frame information registered in each animation table, and a display list is constructed based on all the obtained frame information.
As a result, the VDP is controlled in accordance with the display list generated in the drawing command buffer area, and the display presentation (display of the presentation image by the main image display device 31) is controlled.
That is, when a piece of animation data is set in the display scenario setting area, a display list is constructed that specifies the rendering of the image data specified by that piece of animation data.
On the other hand, when multiple animation data are set in the display scenario setting area, a display list is constructed that specifies that the drawing of the image data specified by the multiple animation data is to be executed in a predetermined order (sequence).
At this time, the order of drawing image data corresponding to the display priority information set in the display scenario setting area is set based on the display priority specified by the display priority information.

(Sound production control method)
Next, a method for controlling sound effects using the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 (sound control unit) determines whether or not command information is stored in the sound command buffer area at a first predetermined period (in this embodiment, 1/30 [s]). If it is determined that command information is stored in the sound command buffer area, the CPU 310 analyzes each piece of command information stored in the sound command buffer area and executes processing according to the analysis result.
At this time, if a performance start command is stored in the sound command buffer area, the sound table corresponding to the sound performance number specified by the performance start command is read out from among the sound tables stored in the control ROM 302. Then, the read sound table is set (stored) in the sound table setting area of the DRAM 304.
In addition, one or more sound tables can be set in the sound table setting area.
The “sound table” is information that defines the progress of sound effects (audio output) by the various speakers 22 .
Then, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the sound presentation based on one or more sound tables set in the sound table setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 executes a sound interrupt process, which will be described later, at a first predetermined cycle (1/30 [s] in this embodiment).
In the sound interrupt process, the information registered in each sound table is updated for all sound tables set in the sound table setting area, and a sound command is generated in the sound command buffer area based on the updated information.
As a result, the sound controller 323 is controlled in accordance with the sound commands generated in the sound command buffer area, and sound production (output of sound from the various speakers 22) is controlled.

(Method of controlling lamp effects)
Next, a method for controlling the lamp effects using the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 (lamp control unit) judges whether or not command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area at a first predetermined period (in this embodiment, 1/30 [s]). If it is judged that command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area, the CPU 310 analyzes each piece of command information stored in the lamp command buffer area and executes processing according to the analysis result.
At this time, if a performance start command is stored in the lamp command buffer area, the lamp control table corresponding to the lamp performance number specified by the performance start command is read out from the lamp control tables stored in the control ROM 302. Then, the read lamp control table is set (stored) in the lamp control table setting area of the DRAM 304.
In addition, one or more lamp control tables can be set in the lamp control table setting area.
The "lamp control table" is information that defines the progress of the lamp effects by the various lamps 20, 21 (the driving (light emission) patterns of the various lamps 20, 21).
Then, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the lamp performance based on one or more lamp control tables set in the lamp control table setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 executes a lamp interrupt process, which will be described later, at a first predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, 1/30 [s]).
In the lamp interrupt processing, the information registered in each lamp control table is updated for all lamp control tables set in the lamp control table setting area, and a lamp command is generated in the lamp command buffer area based on the updated information.
As a result, the lamp controller 317a is controlled according to the lamp commands generated in the lamp command buffer area, and the lamp performance (driving (lighting) of the various lamps 20, 21) is controlled.

(Method of controlling movable body effects)
Next, a method for controlling the movable body performance using the performance control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 (movable body control unit) determines whether or not command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area at a first predetermined period (in this embodiment, 1/30 [s]). If it is determined that command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area, the CPU 310 analyzes each piece of command information stored in the movable body command buffer area and executes processing according to the analysis result.
At this time, if a performance start command is stored in the movable body command buffer area, a movable body control table corresponding to the movable body performance number specified by the performance start command is read out from among the movable body control tables stored in the control ROM 302. Then, the read movable body control table is set (stored) in the movable body control table setting area of the DRAM 304.
The "movable body control table" is information that specifies the progress of the movable body performance by the various motors 23 (various movable bodies) (the drive patterns of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies)).
Then, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the movable body performance based on one or more movable body control tables set in the movable body control table setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 executes a movable body interrupt process, which will be described later, at a first predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, 1/30 [s]).
In the movable body interrupt processing, the information registered in each movable body control table for all movable body control tables set in the movable body control table setting area is updated, and motor commands are generated in the motor command buffer area based on the updated information.
As a result, the motor controller 317b is controlled according to the motor commands generated in the motor command buffer area, and the movable body performance (driving of various motors 23 (various movable bodies)) is controlled.

(Configuration of driver board 330)
The driver board 330 includes a parallel-serial conversion circuit 331 , a lamp driver 332 , and a motor driver 333 .
The lamp driver 332 controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system that constitutes the panel lamp 21 in accordance with the lamp driving data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, the lamp drive data specifies a brightness value corresponding to each system that constitutes the panel lamp 21. An excitation signal (drive current) according to the brightness value specified in the lamp drive data is supplied to each system that constitutes the panel lamp 21. This controls the drive (light emission) of the light-emitting element group that constitutes each system.
The motor driver 333 controls the output of excitation signals (driving currents) to the various motors 23 (motors 23 that constitute the various movable body units) arranged in the game board unit 10 in accordance with the motor driving data input from the motor controller 317b.
At this time, the motor drive data specifies the output value of each motor 23 arranged in the game board unit 10. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the output value specified by the motor drive data is supplied to each motor 23. This controls the drive of each motor 23.
Detection signals from the various sensors 24 are input to the parallel-serial conversion circuit 331. Then, the parallel-serial conversion circuit 331 converts the detection signals from the various sensors 24 into serial data and outputs the serial data to the serial communication controller 317.

(Configuration of the sub-connection board 340)
The sub-connection board 340 is configured to include a parallel-serial conversion circuit 341 , a lamp driver 342 , and a motor driver 343 .
The lamp driver 342 controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system constituting the frame lamp 20 in accordance with the lamp driving data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, the lamp drive data specifies a luminance value corresponding to each system that constitutes the frame lamp 20. An excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the luminance value specified in the lamp drive data is supplied to each system that constitutes the frame lamp 20. This controls the drive (light emission) of the light-emitting element group that constitutes each system.
The motor driver 343 controls the output of excitation signals (driving currents) to the various motors 23 (motors 23 that constitute the various movable body units) arranged in the integrated door unit 4 in accordance with the motor driving data input from the motor controller 317b.
At this time, the motor drive data specifies the output value of each motor 23 disposed in the integrated door unit 4. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the output value specified in the motor drive data is supplied to each motor 23. In this way, the drive of each motor 23 is controlled.
The parallel-serial conversion circuit 341 receives detection signals from the various sensors 24 and detection signals from the various switches 25 to 29. The parallel-serial conversion circuit 341 then converts the detection signals from the various sensors 24 and the detection signals from the various switches 25 to 29 into serial data and outputs the serial data to the serial communication controller 317.

(Regarding gaming machine status)
In the pachinko machine 1, six gaming machine states are defined (specifically, a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state).
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a gaming machine state flag area. In the gaming machine state flag area, a value corresponding to one of six gaming machine states (specifically, a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state) is stored (set) as a gaming machine state flag. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a gaming machine state corresponding to the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is generated.
The "playable state" is a state of the gaming machine in which game progress is possible.
During the playable state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is permitted, which allows the game (normal game and special game) to proceed.
During the playable state, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206. Also, information related to the game is displayed on the main display device 60.

The "setting change state" is a gaming machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 can be changed.
The setting change state occurs when the setting change conditions are met. In this embodiment, the setting change conditions are met when a detection signal is input from the inner frame open sensor 108, a detection signal is input from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal is input from the RAM clear switch 207 when the power is turned on. In other words, when the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is turned to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, when the power is turned on, the setting change state occurs.
During the setting change state, the execution of the processes in steps S4-9 to S4-18 described below is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
During the setting change state, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. All lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
Furthermore, while the setting change state is occurring, it is possible to change the setting values stored in the setting value area by pressing the RAM clear switch 207. Then, when the key switch 208 is turned to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the setting change state is replaced by a playable state, whereby the setting values stored in the setting value area are confirmed.

The "setting confirmation state" is a gaming machine state in which it is possible to confirm the setting values stored in the setting value area of RAM 230.
The setting confirmation state occurs when the setting confirmation conditions are met. In this embodiment, the setting confirmation conditions are met when a detection signal is input from the inner frame open sensor 108, a detection signal is input from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal is not input from the RAM clear switch 207 when the power is turned on. In other words, the setting confirmation state occurs when the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is turned to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed when the power is turned on.
During the setting confirmation state, the execution of the processes in steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area are displayed on the performance display device 206. This makes it possible to confirm the setting values stored in the setting value area. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
It should be noted that while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area cannot be changed.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting confirmation state is replaced with a playable state.

The "setting abnormality state" refers to the state of the gaming machine in which a setting abnormality has occurred.
The setting abnormal state occurs when, during a playable state, it is determined that the setting value set in the setting value area is not within a specified range.
During the occurrence of the setting abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
During the occurrence of a setting abnormality, an error code designating the occurrence of a setting abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. All lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
To recover from the abnormal setting state, it is necessary to perform a power-off and power-on to cause a setting change state.

"RAM abnormal state" refers to the state of the gaming machine in which a RAM abnormality has occurred.
The RAM abnormal state occurs when it is determined that a read/write abnormality has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
During the occurrence of the RAM abnormal state, the execution of the processes in steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
During the occurrence of a RAM abnormality, an error code designating the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. All lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
To recover from a RAM abnormality, it is necessary to perform a power-off and power-on to cause a setting change state.

The "backup abnormality state" is a gaming machine state in which a backup abnormality has occurred.
The backup abnormality state occurs when it is determined that a backup abnormality (specifically, an abnormality in the backup flag or an abnormality in the checksum) has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
During the occurrence of the backup abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described below is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, when a backup abnormality occurs, an error code designating the occurrence of a backup abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
In order to recover from the backup abnormal state, it is necessary to perform a power off and power on to cause a setting change state.

(Regarding setting values)
Next, the setting values (setting information) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
The "set value" is information that specifies the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery) (the probability of winning the jackpot game state). In this embodiment, the set value is specified to be a value of "0" to "5".
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a set value area. In the set value area, any one of values "0" to "5" is stored (set) as a set value. In the pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is set according to the value set in the set value area.
In this embodiment, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery corresponding to each setting value is, in order from highest to lowest, the winning probability corresponding to a setting value of "5", the winning probability corresponding to a setting value of "4", the winning probability corresponding to a setting value of "3", the winning probability corresponding to a setting value of "2", the winning probability corresponding to a setting value of "1", and the winning probability corresponding to a setting value of "0" (high winning probability → low winning probability).

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change (select) the setting value stored in the setting value area during the setting change state. Here, the change of the setting value is executed by the manager of the pachinko machine 1 (such as an employee of the game center where the pachinko machine 1 is installed).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, a setting change state is generated.
When the setting change state occurs, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting value stored in the setting value area is changed. At this time, if the setting value set in the setting value area is changed, the setting value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the setting change state is replaced with a playable state, whereby the setting value stored in the setting value area is finalized.

(Base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, while a playable state occurs, a base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210. In this embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only while a predetermined play state occurs (specifically, while a special low probability state occurs and while time-saving control is stopped).
During the playable state, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206.
The "base ratio" is information calculated based on the number of game balls shot into the game area 30 and the number of prize balls paid out in response to the game balls entering predetermined entry ports (in this embodiment, the first start port 51, the second start port 52, and the other prize entry ports 54 to 57). Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of paid out balls to the number of out balls.
In this embodiment, the base ratio for each predetermined interval (period) is calculated. As the predetermined interval, a interval is defined in which a predetermined number of out balls (60,000 balls in this embodiment) are detected (discharged). That is, each interval is started in response to the end of the previous interval, and is ended in response to the number of out balls detected during the current interval reaching the predetermined number (60,000 balls). The CPU 210 then calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each interval.

Note that a predetermined time may be defined as the predetermined section. That is, the CPU 210 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
The "number of out balls" refers to the number of out balls. An "out ball" refers to a game ball that has been discharged from the game area 30. Specifically, an out ball is a game ball that has passed through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out switch 109).
The game ball discharged from the outlet 58 may be regarded as the out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game ball discharged from the outlet 58, and the game ball detected by the out switch 109 may be regarded as the out ball.
The "number of payouts" refers to the total number of prize balls paid out in response to game balls entering the first starting hole 51, the second starting hole 52 and the other winning holes 54 to 57.

(About the various lotteries)
Next, various lotteries executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed when a game ball passes through the start gate 41. If the normal symbol lottery is won, a normal symbol winning game state is generated. In the normal symbol winning game state, the normal electric role 52a is displaced (opened) from a closed state to an open state, and the game ball can enter the second start gate 52.
In this embodiment, one type of normal symbol winning game state that occurs when the normal symbol lottery is won is set to "normal symbol winning".

When the "regular winning" is won (the regular pattern lottery is won), the regular pattern display device is controlled to stop and display the regular pattern at the "regular winning pattern".
On the other hand, if the player loses the regular symbol lottery, the regular symbol display device is controlled to stop and display the regular symbol as a "losing symbol."
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute time-saving control as auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During execution of the time-saving control, the time for displaying the variable special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "variable time") is shortened compared to when the time-saving control is stopped. In this embodiment, during execution of the time-saving control, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is improved and the time for displaying the variable normal symbols is shortened compared to when the time-saving control is stopped. Also, during execution of the time-saving control, the number of times the normal electric device 52a is opened is increased and the opening time of the normal electric device 52a is extended in the normal winning game state compared to when the time-saving control is stopped.

When a "normal win" is won, the number of times the normal electric device 52a opens is set to 1 or 3, and the opening time of the normal electric device 52a each time is set to 0.5 or 2.0 seconds. During time-saving control, the number of times the normal electric device 52a opens is set to 3, and the opening time of the normal electric device 52a each time is set to 2.0 seconds. During time-saving control, the number of times the normal electric device 52a opens is set to 1, and the opening time of the normal electric device 52a each time is set to 0.5 seconds.

In the pachinko machine 1, the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 51 triggers the execution of a first special symbol lottery, and the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 52 triggers the execution of a second special symbol lottery. If the first or second special symbol lottery is won, a big win game state is generated. In the big win game state, a round game is executed in which the special electric device 53a is shifted from a closed state to an open state, and the game ball can enter the big win hole 53.
In this embodiment, "Jackpot 1" and "Jackpot 2" are set as the types of jackpot game states that arise when the first special pattern lottery is won, and "Jackpot 3" to "Jackpot 6" are set as the types of jackpot game states that arise when the second special pattern lottery is won.

When "jackpot 1" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot 1 pattern" is stopped and displayed on the special pattern 1 display device. Also, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "variable pattern" is stopped and displayed on the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4.
Here, the "probable bonus pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 is a "number pattern" showing the same odd numbers, such as "7, 7, 7," and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 shows a predetermined color.
When the "Big Win 2" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "Big Win 2 pattern" is stopped and displayed on the special chart 1 display device. Also, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "normal pattern" is stopped and displayed on the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4.
Here, the "normal pattern" refers to a display mode in which, for example, the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 is a "number pattern" showing the same even numbers, such as "2, 2, 2," and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 shows a predetermined color.
When "Big Win 3" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "Big Win 3 pattern" is displayed on the special chart 2 display device. Also, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "Probable Variable Pattern" is displayed on the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4.

When "Big Win 4" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "Big Win 4 pattern" is displayed on the special chart 2 display device. Also, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "Probable Variable Pattern" is displayed on the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4.
When the "jackpot 5" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot 5 pattern" is stopped and displayed on the special chart 2 display device. Also, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "latent pattern" is stopped and displayed in the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4.
Here, the "latent pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 is a combination having a predetermined regularity, such as "1, 2, 3," and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 shows a predetermined color.
When the "jackpot 6" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot 6 pattern" is stopped and displayed on the special chart 2 display device. Also, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "latent pattern" is stopped and displayed in the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4.

On the other hand, if the player loses the special symbol lottery (in the case of a "lose"), the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "lose symbol" is displayed in a stopped state on the special symbol 1 display device or the special symbol 2 display device. Also, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "lose symbol" is displayed in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4.
Here, a "losing pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed in the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 has a combination of numbers, such as "1, 6, 9," that is different from the numbers indicated by the "number pattern" stopped and displayed in at least one area and the "number pattern" stopped and displayed in the other areas, and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 has a predetermined color.

If any of "Jackpot 1" to "Jackpot 6" is won, a predetermined number of rounds of play will be played in the jackpot game state.
In this embodiment, if "jackpot 1", "jackpot 2", "jackpot 5" or "jackpot 6" is won, the number of rounds is set to 5. On the other hand, if "jackpot 3" is won, the number of rounds is set to 15. On the other hand, if "jackpot 4" is won, the number of rounds is set to 10.
When "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 6" are won, the maximum opening time of the special electric device 53a in each round of play is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment). Each round of play ends when one of the following conditions is met: the maximum opening time set has elapsed since the special electric device 53a was opened, or the number of game balls entering the big prize opening 53 in that round of play has reached a predetermined upper limit (10 [balls] in this embodiment).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a "special pattern low probability state" and a "special pattern high probability state" are defined as game states related to the probability of winning the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery and second special pattern lottery).
During the occurrence of the "special pattern low probability state", the probability of winning the special pattern lottery is set to the first probability (hereinafter referred to as the "low probability").
During the occurrence of the "special symbol high probability state", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is set to a second probability (hereinafter referred to as "high probability") that is higher than the first probability.
The main control board 200 sets the winning probability of each lottery so that the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery and the winning probability of the second special symbol lottery are synchronized. Here, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery refers to the probability of winning a "win"("jackpot1" to "jackpot 6") that causes a jackpot game state.
In particular, in pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning the special pattern lottery depends on the combination of the setting value set in the setting value area and the game state (special pattern low probability state or special pattern high probability state).

Specifically, when the setting value is "0" and the "special pattern low probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/319.69. On the other hand, when the setting value is "0" and the "special pattern high probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/32.13.
On the other hand, when the setting value is "1" and the "special pattern low probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/312.08. On the other hand, when the setting value is "1" and the "special pattern high probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/31.36.
On the other hand, when the setting value is "2" and the "special pattern low probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/304.82. On the other hand, when the setting value is "2" and the "special pattern high probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/30.62.

On the other hand, when the setting value is "3" and the "special pattern low probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/297.89. On the other hand, when the setting value is "3" and the "special pattern high probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/29.93.
On the other hand, when the setting value is "4" and the "special pattern low probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/291.27. On the other hand, when the setting value is "4" and the "special pattern high probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/29.26.
On the other hand, when the setting value is "5" and the "special pattern low probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/284.94. On the other hand, when the setting value is "5" and the "special pattern high probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/28.62.

If "Jackpot 2" or "Jackpot 6" is won, a "special chart low probability state" will occur during the period from the end of the jackpot game state to the occurrence of the next jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if "jackpot 1" or "jackpot 3" to "jackpot 5" is won, a "special chart high probability state" is generated according to the end of the jackpot game state. In this embodiment, the "special chart high probability state" is started according to the end of the jackpot game state and is ended according to the start of the next jackpot game state (the end of the stop display of the "jackpot pattern").
In addition, the "special pattern high probability state" may be configured to start upon the end of a jackpot game state, and to end (the "special pattern low probability state" is generated) upon the number of special pattern lotteries executed during the occurrence of the "special pattern high probability state" reaching a predetermined number (e.g., 10,000 times).

In addition, if any of "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 6" is won, time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends.
The time-saving control is initiated upon the end of the jackpot game state, and is terminated upon the establishment of one of the following conditions: the special pattern lottery has been won (the "jackpot pattern" has been displayed stationary), or the notification display of the special pattern (variable display and stationary display) has been executed a predetermined number of times to save time.
If "Jackpot 2" or "Jackpot 6" is won, the number of time-saving times is set to 100.
On the other hand, if the player wins "Big Win 1" or "Big Win 3" to "Big Win 5," the predetermined number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 times.

(Regarding control commands)
Next, we will explain the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300, and the control commands transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400.
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300, and communication from the performance control board 300 to the main control board 200 is not performed.
Each control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300 is composed of one byte of high-order data indicating the type of control command and one byte of low-order data indicating the content of the control command.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command consisting of upper data and lower data to the performance control board 300 by serial communication. When the performance control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300 include a pattern type designation command, a variation mode designation command, a variation pattern designation command, a stop designation command, a game status designation command, a number of reserved balls designation command, an opening designation command, a round start designation command, a round end designation command, an ending designation command, a first look-ahead designation command, a second look-ahead designation command, a third look-ahead designation command, an error designation command, a demo designation command, a setting value designation command, a game status designation command, and the like.
The symbol type designation command is a command that designates the type of the stopping symbol (stopping symbol number). Specifically, the symbol type designation command designates one of the types of "miss symbol" and "jackpot 1 symbol" to "jackpot 6 symbol". The symbol type designation command is transmitted at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. In this embodiment, the symbol type designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

The fluctuation mode designation command is a command that designates the type of fluctuation mode (fluctuation mode number). The fluctuation mode designation command designates the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation mode number by designating the fluctuation mode number. The fluctuation mode designation command designates the fluctuation time of the first half period (the aspect of the first half period of the fluctuation performance) of the special pattern fluctuation display (fluctuation performance).
In this embodiment, m (plural) types of fluctuation modes are set, each corresponding to a different fluctuation time. The fluctuation mode designation command designates one ("fluctuation mode m") of the m types of fluctuation modes (fluctuation mode numbers).

The variation pattern designation command is a command that designates the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number). The variation pattern designation command designates the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by designating the variation pattern number. The variation pattern designation command designates the variation time of the latter half period (the aspect of the latter half period of the variation performance) of the variation display (variation performance) of the special pattern.
In this embodiment, n (plural) types of fluctuation patterns are set, each of which is associated with a different fluctuation time. The fluctuation pattern designation command designates one ("fluctuation pattern n") of the n types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern numbers).
The variation mode designation command and the variation pattern designation command are sent at the start of the variation display of the special pattern.

The stop command is a command that specifies the stop display of the special symbols (effect symbols z1 and z2). The stop command is transmitted at the start of the stop display of the special symbols.
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value).
Here, the "game state offset value" is information that specifies the game state. In this embodiment, as the game state offset value, a numerical value corresponding to each combination of the value of the time-saving control flag, the value of the special chart high probability state flag, the value of the previous jackpot pattern flag, and the value of the post-jackpot spin counter is set.
The gaming state designation command designates one gaming state offset value. The gaming state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when a special gaming phase (described later) is changed, and the like.

The reserved number designation command is a command to designate the reserved number. In this embodiment, the reserved number designation command designates that the reserved number (special drawing 1 reserved number or special drawing 2 reserved number) has increased by "1", that the reserved number has decreased by "1", or the reserved number, etc.
Here, the "number of reserved special symbols 1" refers to the number of reserved notification displays (variable and stop displays) of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 display device. Also, the "number of reserved special symbols 2" refers to the number of reserved notification displays (variable and stop displays) of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 display device.
The reserved number designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when game information is stored, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, etc. In this embodiment, the reserved number designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

The opening designation command is a command that designates the start of the opening period (the start of the jackpot gaming state). The opening designation command designates the type of jackpot gaming state (type of "jackpot symbol"). Specifically, the opening designation command designates one type from "jackpot 1 symbol" to "jackpot 6 symbol". The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (the start of the jackpot gaming state).
The round start designation command is a command that designates the start of a round of play. The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of a round of play.
The round end command is a command that specifies the end of a round of play. The round end command is transmitted at the end of a round of play.
The ending designation command is a command that designates the start of an ending period, and is transmitted at the start of the ending period.

The first look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the type of the stop symbol (one of the types of "miss symbol" and "jackpot 1 symbol" to "jackpot 6 symbol"). In this embodiment, the first look-ahead designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The second read-ahead designation command is a command that designates the content of the variation mode. Specifically, the second read-ahead designation command designates that the type of the variation mode is indefinite ("indefinite value"), or designates one of m types of variation modes (variation mode number) ("variation mode m"). The second read-ahead designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.
The third look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the content of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the third look-ahead designation command designates that the type of the fluctuation pattern is indefinite ("indefinite value"), or designates one of n types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern number) ("fluctuation pattern n"). The third look-ahead designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.

The error designation command is a command that designates the occurrence of various errors. In this embodiment, the error designation command designates the occurrence of a vibration error, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, or a right-stroke error. The error designation command is transmitted when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demo designation command is a command that designates the start of a customer waiting state. The demo designation command is transmitted at the start of a customer waiting state.
The setting value designation command is a command that designates a setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230. The setting value designation command is sent when the RAM is cleared, when the power is restored after being turned on, when the setting change state ends, when the setting confirmation state ends, etc.
The game status designation command is a command that designates the occurrence (start) or cancellation (end) of a playable state. The game status designation command is transmitted when a playable state occurs (start) and when a playable state is cancelled (end).

The main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 is performed bidirectionally. Each control command transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 is composed of 1 byte of data.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command to the dispensing control board 400 by serial communication. When the dispensing control board 400 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and this interrupt processing causes the data of the control command to be stored in a predetermined area of RAM. Also, the dispensing control board 400 transmits a control command to the main control board 200 by serial communication. When the main control board 200 receives a control command from the dispensing control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and this interrupt processing causes the data of the control command to be stored in a predetermined area of RAM 230.

In the pachinko machine 1, a command to specify the number of winning balls, etc., is set as a control command to be sent from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400.
The number of prize balls designation command is a command that designates the number of prize balls to be paid out. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls designation command designates the payout of n prize balls (n=1 to 15). The number of prize balls designation command is transmitted when the payout control board 400 executes the payout operation of the prize balls.
In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200 are set to specify the occurrence and release of a payout error, the occurrence and release of a full tank error, the occurrence and release of a ball jam error, etc. Each control command is transmitted when the occurrence and release of various errors are detected.

(Processing Executed on Main Control Board 200)
Next, the processing executed by the main control board 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured on the main control board 200 will be described.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the random number generating circuit 203 starts the hardware random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, the values of the first loop counter to the third loop counter are updated by "1" within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (in this embodiment, every 0.083 [μs]).

In addition, in the hard random number update process, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated by "1" within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 10006) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (in this embodiment, every 2.666 [μs]).
Then, the winning random number of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the second special symbol lottery, and the reach group random number are updated by the hard random number update process. Note that the hard random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generating circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 start a control command transmission process that transmits the control commands stored in the FIFO buffer to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400. Note that the control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Next, we will explain the game control process that the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 executes based on the program (software) stored in the ROM 220.

(CPU initialization process)
First, the CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the CPU initialization process.
When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in Fig. 7. The CPU initialization process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the CPU initialization process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the CPU initialization process is started, the process first proceeds to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, a startup program is read from the ROM 220, and settings required for executing various processes, such as register settings, are performed.

In addition, in the initial setting process, a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 are read.
Specifically, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read twice, and based on the results of the two reads, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the RAM clear switch 207 has occurred. The determination result is then stored as switch information for the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, a value indicating that the ON state has occurred (in this embodiment, "1") is stored as the switch information, and if it is determined that the ON state has not occurred, a value indicating that the ON state has not occurred (in this embodiment, "0") is stored as the switch information.

The value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is read twice, and based on the results of the two reads, it is determined whether the setting key switch 208 is in an ON state. The determination result is then saved as switch information for the setting key switch 208. At this time, if it is determined that the ON state is occurring, a value indicating that the ON state is occurring (in this embodiment, "1") is saved as the switch information, and if it is determined that the ON state is not occurring, a value indicating that the ON state is not occurring (in this embodiment, "0") is saved as the switch information.

The value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the inner frame open sensor 108 is read twice, and based on the results of the two reads, it is determined whether or not the inner frame open sensor 108 is in an ON state. If it is determined that the ON state is not occurring, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the ON state is not occurring (in this embodiment, "0"). On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state is occurring, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, a wait processing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 [s] in this embodiment) is set in a timer counter. This starts measuring the set wait processing time by the timer counter.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed. If it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4. If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the process of step S1-3 is repeated.

In step S1-4, a RAM access permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, the process required to permit access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to the access permission is stored as a RAM protect value in a RAM access protection area of the RAM 230. This allows the CPU 210 to access the RAM 230.

In step S1-5, a gaming machine status flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, a gaming machine status flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is saved (loaded) into the D register.
In step S1-6, it is determined whether the backup valid flag is normal or not. If it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-7. If it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, if the value (backup valid flag) stored in the backup valid flag area of RAM 230 is a specified valid value, the backup valid flag is determined to be normal, and if the value stored in the backup valid flag area is not the specified valid value, the backup valid flag is determined to be abnormal.

In step S1-7, a checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, a checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 out of the backup information.
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230 out of the backup information.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal or not. If it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-9. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, if both of the following conditions are met: "The checksum value of used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of used area M1 stored in the checksum area of RAM 230" and "The checksum value of unused area M2 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of unused area M2 stored in the checksum area," the checksum is determined to be normal.
On the other hand, if at least one of the following conditions is not met: "The checksum value of used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of used area M1 stored in the checksum area of RAM 230" and "The checksum value of unused area M2 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of unused area M2 stored in the checksum area," the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S1-9, a process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is turned on is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-10. In the process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is turned on, the area other than the setting value area and the game machine status flag area (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, the normal game-related area 1, the normal game-related area 2, and the stack area) is set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230.
In step S1-10, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is in an on state. If it is determined that the on state is not occurring (No), the process proceeds to step S1-11. If it is determined that the on state is occurring (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether or not the on state has occurred for the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, if a value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the on state has occurred, and if a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved, it is determined that the on state has not occurred.

In step S1-11, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-12, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether the setting confirmation condition is met, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-13, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not met (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
The "setting confirmation condition" is met when a playable state has occurred, and the on state of the RAM clear switch 207 has not occurred, and the on state of the setting key switch 208 has occurred, and the on state of the inner frame open sensor 108 has occurred.
Here, in step S1-1, if the on state has not occurred for the inner frame open sensor 108, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the on state has not occurred. As a result, if the on state has occurred for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has occurred is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. On the other hand, if the on state has not occurred for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208.
Therefore, in step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and if a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is saved, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-13, a setting check state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the setting check state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting value check state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, a process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is restored, the setting value area, the game machine status flag area, the normal game related area 2, and other areas excluding the stack area (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error related area, and the normal game related area 1) are set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230.

In step S1-15, power recovery initialization processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. In the power recovery initialization processing, the range of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 that was set in step S1-14 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-16, a subcommand transmission process upon power recovery is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the subcommand transmission process upon power recovery, a subcommand (power recovery designation command) for designating that the power has been restored from power interruption is stored in a subcommand output request buffer in the RAM 230.
In step S1-17, a dispensing command transmission process at power recovery is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the dispensing command transmission process at power recovery, a dispensing command specifying that the power has been restored from a power interruption is stored in a dispensing command output request buffer in the RAM 230.

In step S1-18, a backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, an unused area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the unused area read/write check process, the unused area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is executed.
In step S1-20, an abnormality clearing target area setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-21. In the abnormality clearing target area setting process, all areas (specifically, the set value area, the gaming machine status flag area, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, the normal game-related area 1, the normal game-related area 2, and the stack area) are set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the use area M1 of the RAM 230.
In step S1-21, a used area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-22. In the used area read/write check process, the range of used area M1 of RAM 230 set in step S1-20 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is executed.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether the results of the read/write checks performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 are normal or not. If it is determined that the results of the read/write checks are not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-23. If it is determined that the results of the read/write checks are normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-24.
In step S1-23, a RAM abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-24, it is determined whether a setting confirmation state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a setting confirmation state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-25, and if it is determined that a setting confirmation state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-26.
Here, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred, and if the value is not corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has not occurred.
In step S1-25, a playable state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-26. In the playable state setting process, a value corresponding to a playable state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether the setting change condition is met, and if it is determined that the setting change condition is met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-27, and if it is determined that the setting change condition is not met (No), the process proceeds to step S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is met when the RAM clear switch 207 is in an on state, the setting key switch 208 is in an on state, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is in an on state.
Here, as described above, when an on state occurs for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that an on state occurs is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. On the other hand, when an on state does not occur for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that an on state does not occur is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208.
Therefore, in step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change conditions are met based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 stored in step S1-1.
At this time, if values indicating that an ON state has occurred are stored for both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, it is determined that the setting change condition is met. On the other hand, if a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored for at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, it is determined that the setting change condition is not met.

In step S1-27, a setting change state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-28, a gaming machine status flag saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-29. In the gaming machine status flag saving process, the gaming machine status flag set in the D register is saved in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S1-29, a RAM clear subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-30. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (RAM clear designation command) designating that the RAM has been cleared is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-30, a RAM clear initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-31. In the RAM clear initialization process, the range of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 that was set in step S1-9 or step S1-20 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-31, a payout command transmission process when the RAM is cleared is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process when the RAM is cleared, a payout command specifying that the RAM has been cleared is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-32, a sub-command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-33. In the sub-command setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command that designates the current gaming machine state is stored in a sub-command output request buffer in the RAM 230.
Specifically, in the sub-command setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command that designates the gaming machine state flag (gaming machine state) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of RAM 230 is stored in a sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.
In step S1-33, a sub-command group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-34. In the sub-command group setting process, the sub-command group is stored in the sub-command output request buffer in the RAM 230.
Here, the group of subcommands includes a subcommand for specifying the phase when power is restored, a subcommand for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand for specifying the launch position, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the first special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the second special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 1, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 2, a subcommand for specifying the value of the time-saving counter, a setting value designation command for specifying a setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230, and the like.

In step S1-34, an initial display time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in an initial display timer.
In step S1-35, an interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1). In the interrupt setting process, the CTC (counter/timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initialized.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, an interrupt vector register is set, and an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(Main loop processing)
Next, the main loop process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main loop process.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-35) shown in Fig. 7 ends, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in Fig. 8. The main loop process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the main loop process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the main loop process starts, the process first proceeds to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts from other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt disable state is set, execution of a power cut-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.

In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating initial value random numbers is updated.
Here, the "initial value random number" is a random number used to determine the initial value and end value of soft random numbers (winning pattern random numbers, reach mode random numbers, variable pattern random numbers, etc.), which are random numbers generated in a program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within a preset range from the initial value to the end value. The initial value and the end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed every time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and the end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, a main command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the dispensing control board 400 (the control command transmitted from the dispensing control board 400 to the main control board 200) is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, a subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the sub-commands input to the transmission data register are stored in the FIFO buffer. The sub-commands stored in the FIFO buffer are then transmitted to the performance control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.

In step S2-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released. As a result, the period from when the interrupt permission process in step S2-5 is executed until when the interrupt prohibition process in step S2-1 is executed becomes an interrupt permission period in which the execution of a power-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like is permitted.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update processing, software random numbers other than winning symbol random numbers (specifically, reach mode random numbers, variable pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Evacuation process when power is cut off)
Next, the power-off save process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the save process at the time of power interruption.
The main control board 200 is configured to include a power interruption detection circuit (not shown). The power interruption detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 600, and outputs a power interruption warning signal to the input port 204 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
When the CPU 210 receives the power cutoff warning signal, it starts the power cutoff save process shown in Fig. 9 during the interruption permitted period of the main loop process. The power cutoff save process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the power cutoff save process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the power interruption save process is started, the process first proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register save process, the values of the registers used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in a save area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, a power cutoff notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cutoff notice signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value ("1" or "0") set in the reception storage area of the input port 204 corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the power cut-off warning signal), it is determined whether or not a power cut-off warning signal has been input from the power cut-off detection circuit.If it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and if it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, an output port stop process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop process, the output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4) is stopped.
Specifically, in the output port stopping process, the values of all bits included in the port registers of the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4) are initialized, which stops the output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4).
In step S3-5, a backup valid flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is saved in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S3-6, a checksum storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated and stored.
Specifically, in the checksum saving process, a checksum is first calculated based on the information stored in used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of RAM 230. The calculated checksum value is then saved in the checksum area of RAM 230.
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230. The calculated checksum value is then saved in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, a RAM access prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to the access prohibition is stored as a RAM protect value in a RAM access protection area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-8, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times the power cutoff notice signal has been read is set as the value of the loop counter for recovery determination.
In step S3-9, a power cutoff notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cutoff notice signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value ("1" or "0") set in the reception storage area of the input port 204 corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal is read.
In step S3-10, based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the power cut-off warning signal), it is determined whether or not a power cut-off warning signal has been input from the power cut-off detection circuit.If it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and if it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-8.

In step S3-11, a loop counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12, in which "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether the value of the loop counter for recovery determination is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the loop counter for recovery determination is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the CPU initialization process (step S1-1). If it is determined that the value of the loop counter for recovery determination is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, a register restore process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restore process, the register values saved in step S3-1 are restored. After the register restore process is completed, the process returns to the main loop process (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Timer interrupt processing)
Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process.
The clock generating circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal at a predetermined interrupt period (4.0 ms in this embodiment).
In response to the occurrence of an interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts a timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 10 during an interrupt permitted period of the main loop process. The main loop process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the main loop process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the process first proceeds to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in a save area of the RAM 230.
In step S4-2, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission process, an interrupt is permitted.
In step S4-3, a dynamic port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4, which will be described later.

In step S4-4, a port input process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. In the port input process, the state of each switch/sensor (each signal) is obtained.
The RAM 230 is provided with an input information storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (each signal input to the input port 204) connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), and an on state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (each signal input to the input port 204) connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3).
In the port input process, first, for each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), the information set in the receiving memory area corresponding to that switch/sensor is obtained, and the obtained information is saved (stored) in the input information memory area corresponding to that switch/sensor.
As a result, for each switch sensor, when a detection signal is input from that switch sensor (high level), a "1" is stored in the input information memory area corresponding to that switch sensor, and when a detection signal is not input from that switch sensor (low level), a "0" is stored in the input memory area corresponding to that switch sensor.

Next, it is determined whether or not an ON state has occurred for each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3). At this time, it is determined whether or not an ON state has occurred for each switch/sensor based on the value stored in the input information storage area in the previous port input process and the value stored in the input information storage area in the current port input process.
The "on state" refers to a state in which a detection signal has changed from a state in which no detection signal is being input (low level) to a state in which a detection signal is being input (high level).
When it is determined that an ON state has occurred for each switch/sensor, a "1" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to that switch/sensor. On the other hand, when it is determined that an ON state has not occurred for each switch/sensor, a "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to that switch/sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor is referred to as the "switch bit data" of that switch/sensor.
In particular, the input port 1 is provided with a receiving memory area corresponding to the handle detection signal input from the launch enabling condition detection unit 422. Then, in the port input process, information set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the handle detection signal of the input port 1 is acquired, and the acquired information is saved (stored) in the input information memory area corresponding to the handle detection signal.

In step S4-5, a gaming machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the gaming machine state flag acquisition process, the gaming machine state flag stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-7, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-9.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine state flag has a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the acquired gaming machine state flag does not have a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S4-7, it is determined whether an abnormal condition has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that an abnormal condition has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-8, and if it is determined that an abnormal condition has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-19.
Here, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred based on the gaming machine status flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. If the acquired gaming machine status flag is not a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has not occurred.

In step S4-8, a setting-related process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19, which will be described later.
In step S4-9, a timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, the timer update process updates the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.).
In step S4-10, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. The initial value random number update process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating initial value random numbers is updated.
In step S4-11, a winning symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the winning symbol random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating a winning symbol random number among software random numbers is updated.
In step S4-12, a switch management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the switch management process, processes (such as obtaining various random numbers) are executed according to the state (whether or not the ON state is detected) of each of the switches 101, 102, and 104. The switch management process will be described later.

In step S4-13, a special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special image display device and the operation of the special electric device 53a are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-14, a normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. In the normal game management process, the operation of the normal map display device and the operation of the normal electric role object 52a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.

In step S4-15, a state management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the state management process, the occurrence and release of various errors (abnormal states) are monitored. Then, when the occurrence and release of various errors is detected, various settings (setting of subcommands, etc.) are executed.
In addition, in the state management process, it is determined whether the handle detection signal has changed from a state where it is not input to a state where it is input, based on the value stored in the input information storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal (the value stored in the previous timer interrupt process and the value stored in the current timer interrupt process). If it is determined that the handle detection signal has changed from a state where it is not input to a state where it is input, a game status designation command that designates the occurrence of a state where it is possible to fire is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Furthermore, in the state management process, based on the value stored in the input information storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal (the value stored in the previous timer interrupt process and the value stored in the current timer interrupt process), it is determined whether the handle detection signal has changed from an input state to an input state. Then, when it is determined that the handle detection signal has changed from an input state to an input state, a game status designation command that designates the release of the launch-enabled state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-16, a prize-winning port switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the prize-winning port switch process, a process (such as updating various counters) is executed according to the state (whether or not the on state is detected) of each of the switches 101 to 103, 105, and 106.

In step S4-17, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
In this embodiment, the prize ball control counters include prize ball control counter 1 in which the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 53 is stored, prize ball control counter 2 in which the number of game balls that have entered the right other prize opening 54 is stored, prize ball control counter 3 in which the number of game balls that have entered the upper left, middle left and lower left other prize openings 55 to 57 is stored, prize ball control counter 4 in which the number of game balls that have entered the first start opening 51 is stored, and prize ball control counter 5 in which the number of game balls that have entered the second start opening 52 is stored.
In the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (15 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, when the payout of the prize balls by the game ball payout device 440 is completed, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command specifying the completion of the payout to the main control board 200. Then, in response to receiving the main command specifying the completion of the payout, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or greater, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is sent to the payout control board 400. Then, in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or greater, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is sent to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or greater, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 3 [balls]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or greater, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is sent to the payout control board 400. Then, in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5.

In step S4-18, a launch position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the launch position designation management process, a process related to the designation of the launch position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when a state is changed from one that designates the launch of the game ball to the left path to one that designates the launch of the game ball to the right path (such as when a big win game state starts), the launch position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "1," and a subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is transmitted to the performance control board 300.
On the other hand, when the state changes from one specifying the launch of the game ball onto the right path to one specifying the launch of the game ball onto the left path (such as when the time-saving control ends), the launch position designation flag area of RAM 230 is set to "0".

In step S4-19, an external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signals) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In this embodiment, external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (electronic device such as a hall computer or data display device) includes information on the number of times a pattern has been determined, information on the starting port, information on a jackpot, security information, information on the number of payouts from the out port, information on the occurrence of an error, etc.
The "symbol determination count information" is external information related to the number of times the special symbol lottery (variable display and stop display of special symbols) is executed. The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the symbol determination count information to the hall computer (or a data display device) every time the number of times the special symbol stop display is executed reaches a predetermined number.
The "start port information" is external information related to the entry of game balls into the start ports 51 and 52. Each time the CPU 210 detects the ON state of the detection signal input from the start port switches 101 and 102, it outputs an external signal corresponding to the start port information to the hall computer (or a data display device).

The "jackpot information" is external information related to the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state. Each time a jackpot gaming state occurs, the main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer (or a data display device).
The "outlet payout information" is external information related to the number of game balls discharged from the discharge path (or the number of game balls discharged from the outlet 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the outlet payout number information to the hall computer every time the value of the external information out ball number counter reaches a predetermined value.
The "security information" is external information indicating that a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. When the value of the security timer is "1" or greater, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hall computer.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information confirmation count counter has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). Then, if it is determined that the value of the external information confirmation count counter has reached the predetermined value, the pattern confirmation count information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the external information confirmation count counter. As a result, the pattern confirmation count information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the start port ball entry count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). Then, if it is determined that the value of the start port ball entry count counter for external information has reached the predetermined value, the start port information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. Then, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the start port ball entry count counter for external information. As a result, the start port information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In addition, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information jackpot count counter has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). If it is determined that the value of the external information jackpot count counter has reached the predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Then, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the external information jackpot count counter. This causes the jackpot information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the out ball count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]). Then, if it is determined that the value of the out ball count counter for external information has reached the predetermined value, the out port payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]) is subtracted from the value of the out ball count counter for external information. As a result, the out port payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In addition, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 corresponds to a playable state.
Then, if it is determined that the value stored in the gaming machine status flag area is not a value corresponding to a playable state (determined to be a value corresponding to a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, or a backup abnormal state), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the security timer is equal to or greater than "1". If it is determined that the value of the security timer is equal to or greater than "1", the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In step S4-20, an LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 includes a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits).
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized), and the common 3 output request buffer is also cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer is set to "0", and each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer is set to "0".

Next, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained.
Then, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a playable state, a normal state display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a setting change state, a setting change display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), an abnormal state display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special chart 1 display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the obtained value of the special chart 1 display pattern counter is set in the common 0 output request buffer.
As a result, the first special symbol is displayed by LED1 to LED8, among the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60.
Next, the value of the special chart 2 display pattern counter is obtained, and display data (8 bits) corresponding to the obtained value of the special chart 2 display pattern counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, the second special symbol is displayed by LED9 to LED16, among the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60.
Next, the value of the regular display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value of the regular display pattern counter is set as output data a.

Next, it is determined whether the value set in the special game phase flag area of RAM 230 is a value that specifies any of the special game phases among "state before opening of large prize opening,""state of controlling opening of large prize opening,""state of enabling closing of large prize opening," and "state of waiting for completion of opening of large prize opening."
Then, if it is determined that the value set in the special game phase flag area is a value specifying one of the special game phases among "state before opening of large prize opening", "large prize opening opening control state", "large prize opening closure enabled state" and "large prize opening opening end waiting state", the value set in the special pattern determination flag area of RAM 230 (a value corresponding to the type of large prize pattern) is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data b.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value set in the special game phase flag area is not a value specifying any of the special game phases among "state before large prize opening,""large prize opening opening control state,""large prize opening closure enabled state," and "large prize opening end waiting state," output data b is not set.

Next, the value set in the launch position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as the output data c.
Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by logically summing the output data a to output data c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60, LEDs 17 and 18 display normal symbols, LEDs 19 to 23 display the number of rounds of play to be executed during a jackpot game state (type of jackpot game state), and LED 24 displays the path (left path or right path) along which the game ball should be shot.
Next, the value of the special chart 1 reserved number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data d.
Next, the value of the special chart 2 reserved number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data e.
Next, the value of the normal pending number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data f.

Next, it is determined whether the power supply has been restored.
Then, when it is determined that the power has been restored, the value set in the special chart high probability state flag area is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data g.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the power has not been restored, the output data g is not set.
Next, the value set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as the output data h.
Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by logically ORing the output data d to output data h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60, LEDs 25 and 26 display the number of reserved special chart 1, LEDs 27 and 28 display the number of reserved special chart 2, LEDs 29 and 30 display the number of reserved regular charts, LED 31 displays the game status when the power is restored (when a high probability state for special charts is occurring or when a low probability state for special charts is occurring), and LED 32 displays the current game status (time-saving control is being executed or stopped).

In the setting change display data setting process, information indicating that a setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and information indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "- " is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "r", LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "n.", LEDs 49 to 56 display the letter "-", and LEDs 57 to 64 display numbers indicating the set value.

In the display data setting process during setting confirmation, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and information indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer. Note that no display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (it remains at the clear value).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "r" is displayed by LED33 to LED40, the character "n." is displayed by LED41 to LED48, and numbers indicating the set value are displayed by LED57 to LED64. Note that LED49 to LED56 are turned off.

In the abnormality display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) for "E" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) for "r." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the display data (error code) corresponding to the abnormal state that has occurred (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. Note that no display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (it remains at the clear value).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "E" is displayed by LED33 to LED40, the character "r." is displayed by LED41 to LED48, and a number indicating an error code is displayed by LED57 to LED64. Note that LED49 to LED56 are turned off.

In step S4-21, a solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, the control data (drive data) to be output to each of the solenoids 64, 65 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-22, a port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer, the solenoids 64, 65, etc.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signals, control signals, etc.) set in the port output request buffer are output to the output port 205 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signals set in the port output request buffer are output to the hall computer. Also, the solenoids 64, 65 are driven and controlled based on the drive signals set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-24. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts from other processes. As a result, during the period when the interrupt disable state is set, execution of a power cut-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.

In step S4-24, a test signal output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-25. In the test signal output process, information for testing (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is based on a program for executing a test-related process defined by the gaming machine regulations. That is, the test signal output process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The test signal tube is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, time-saving control execution state, probability state of special pattern lottery, etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230.
In step S4-25, a performance display device control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-26, which will be described later.
In step S4-26, a register restore process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the program returns to the original process. In the register restore process, the register values saved in step S4-1 are restored. After the register restore process is terminated, the program returns to the main loop process (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output process in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the dynamic port output process.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, the process first proceeds to step S29-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S29-1, an output data clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-2. In the output data clear process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the A register is set to "0".
In step S29-2, a main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 0. As a result, output port 0 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 goes low.

In step S29-3, a performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 4. As a result, output port 4 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206 goes low.
In step S29-4, a common selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether the value of the common counter has reached an upper limit value (in this embodiment, "3") or not. If it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit value, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit value, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the common counter.

In step S29-5, a common output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-6.
In the common output process, output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to output port 1.
That is, when the value of the common counter is "0", output data in which "COM0" is at high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "1", output data in which "COM1" is at high level and "COM0", "COM2", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "2", output data in which "COM2" is at high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "3", output data in which "COM3" is at high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM2" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".

In addition, in the common output process, output data of the launch permission signal is output to output port 1.
That is, first, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (is set).
When it is determined that a playable state has occurred, output data for setting the launch permission signal to a high level is output to the output port 1. As a result, the launch permission signal is output.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the playable state has not occurred, output data for setting the launch permission signal to a low level is output to the output port 1. This stops the output of the launch permission signal.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.
In this embodiment, the common output process is configured to set the output of the launch permission signal only when it is determined that a playable state has occurred. As a result, the launch permission signal is output only while a playable state is occurring (being set). However, the common output process may be configured to set the output of the launch permission signal regardless of the gaming machine state. With this configuration, the launch permission signal can be output at all times while the main control board 200 is powered on.

In step S29-6, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-7, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S29-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S29-7, a main display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, display data for the main display device 60 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer in the RAM 230 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer in the LED display setting process (specifically, the normal display data setting process) of step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt processing.

In step S29-8, a main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to output port 0.
As a result, data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250a.
That is, the display on the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-10. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts from other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt disable state is set, execution of a power cut-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S29-10, a performance display device output process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4), which will be described later.

In step S29-11, a performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer in the RAM 230 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer in the LED display setting process of step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process (specifically, the display data setting process when changing settings, the display data setting process when checking settings, or the display data setting process when an abnormality occurs).

In step S29-12, a performance display device data output process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-11 is output to output port 4.
As a result, data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the performance display device output process.
The performance display device output process is based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. In other words, the performance display device output process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device output process is called during execution of the dynamic port output process.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, it first proceeds to step S30-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S30-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM. In addition, the values of all stack pointers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM.

In step S30-2, a performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, the value of the common counter is first confirmed. Then, the display data set in the area of the discrimination segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer of the RAM 230 corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control process of step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt processing.

In step S30-3, a performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S30-2 is output to the output port 4.
As a result, data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the discrimination segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the discrimination segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, a register restoration process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S30-1 (the register values used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the stack pointer value saved in step S30-1 (the stack pointer value used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) are restored.
In step S30-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released. This allows the execution of a power-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like.

(Settings related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, the process first proceeds to step S37-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether a setting change state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a setting change state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-2, and if it is determined that a setting change state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S37-8.
Here, it is determined whether or not a setting change state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has not occurred.

In step S37-2, a setting value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the setting value acquisition process, the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are acquired (loaded), and the acquired setting values are stored in a register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed (No), the process proceeds to step S37-5.
Here, with regard to the RAM clear switch 207, if an on state occurs, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if an on state does not occur, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed.
In step S37-4, a setting value update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the setting value update process, "1" is added to the setting value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether the setting value stored in the register is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (in this embodiment, "6"), and if it is determined that the setting value stored in the register is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (the setting value is greater than or equal to the predetermined setting comparison value) (No), the process proceeds to step S37-6, and if it is determined that the setting value stored in the register is less than the predetermined setting comparison value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, a setting value initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-7. In the setting value initialization process, the setting values stored in the registers are overwritten with predetermined initial values (in this embodiment, "0").
In step S37-7, a set value save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-8. In the set value save process, the set values stored in the registers are saved in the set value area of RAM 230.

In step S37-8, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (is in the OFF state) (No), the process proceeds to step S37-9. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19).
Here, if the setting key switch 208 is in an on state, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in an on state, and if the on state is not occurring, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in an on state.
In step S37-9, a sub-command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-10. In the sub-command setting process, a setting-related end command (sub-command) is stored in the sub-command output request buffer in RAM 230.

In step S37-10, a sub-command group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-11. In the sub-command group setting process, the sub-command group is stored in a sub-command output request buffer in RAM 230.
Here, the group of subcommands includes a subcommand for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand for specifying the launch position, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the first special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the second special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 1, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 2, a subcommand for specifying the value of the time-saving counter, a setting value specification command for specifying a setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230, and the like.
In step S37-11, a RAM set process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). In the RAM set process, a game-ready state is set as the gaming machine state.
Specifically, a value corresponding to a playable state is saved as the value of the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 (gaming machine state flag).

(Switch management process)
Next, the switch management process in step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the switch management process.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, the process first proceeds to step S5-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the on state of the gate switch 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the gate switch 104 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2. If it is determined that the on state of the gate switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, a normal starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. The normal starting ball detection process will be described later.
In addition, in the normal starting ball detection process, it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-hand hitting period. If it is determined that the game is not in a right-hand hitting period (it is in a left-hand hitting period), "1" is added to the value of the right-hand hitting error counter.
In this embodiment, the period during which one of the big win game state and the time-saving control is being executed is the right-hand hit period, while the period during which the normal game state (the game state during which the big win game state is not being executed and the time-saving control is stopped) is being executed is the left-hand hit period.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-4. If it is determined that the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, a special chart 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special chart 1 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special diagram 2 start port switch 102 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special diagram 2 start port switch 102 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-6. If it is determined that the on state of the special diagram 2 start port switch 102 has not been detected (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S5-6, the special chart 2 starting ball detection process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). The special chart 2 starting ball detection process will be described later.

(Normal starting ball detection process)
Next, the normal starting ball detection process in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the normal starting ball detection process.
When the normal starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, the process first proceeds to step S6-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S6-1, a normal symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process, a winning random number (random number value) is acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to the normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether the value of the regular map pending number counter is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4") or not. If it is determined that the value of the regular map pending number counter is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3. If it is determined that the value of the regular map pending number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3).
In step S6-3, a regular map reservation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the regular map reservation counter update process, the value set in the regular map reservation counter is added with "1" and the new value is set in the regular map reservation counter.

In step S6-4, a normal random number storage process is executed, and the process is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the normal random number storage process, the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the normal game information storage area of the RAM 230 as normal game information.
The RAM 230 is composed of a memory area 0 in which regular game information during game play is stored, and a regular game information memory area in which regular game information for which a regular win/loss determination is pending is stored.
The regular game play information storage area is configured to include memory area 1 to memory area 4 as storage areas capable of storing regular game play information.
The priority of each memory area is specified as follows, from highest priority to lowest priority: memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, and memory area 4 (highest to lowest). The regular game information stored in the regular game information storage area is subjected to regular game winning/losing judgment in order from the information stored in the memory area with the highest priority.
In the normal random number storage process, the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored as normal game information in the normal game information storage area. At this time, the normal game information is stored in the storage area with the highest priority among the available storage areas.
That is, if the current value of the regular map reserved number counter is "1", the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in memory area 1. If the current value of the regular map reserved number counter is "2", the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in memory area 2. If the current value of the regular map reserved number counter is "3", the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in memory area 3. If the current value of the regular map reserved number counter is "4", the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in memory area 4.

(Special Figure 1 Starting ball detection process)
Next, the special chart 1 starting ball detection process in step S5-4 will be explained.
Figure 16 is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process for special chart 1.
When the special chart 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, it first proceeds to step S7-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S7-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in a special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information start hole ball entry count counter.
In addition, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not the right-hit period is in progress. If it is determined that the right-hit period is not in progress (the left-hit period is in progress), the value of the right-hit error counter is reset (the value of the right-hit error counter is set to "0").
In step S7-2, a reserved number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the reserved number counter address setting process, the address of the reserved number counter for special drawing 1 is set in the reserved number counter address setting area of RAM 230.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special chart 2 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special chart 2 starting ball detection process in step S5-6 will be explained.
Figure 17 is a flowchart showing the special chart 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special chart 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, it first proceeds to step S8-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S8-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information start hole ball entry count counter.
In addition, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not the right-hit period is in progress. If it is determined that the right-hit period is not in progress (the left-hit period is in progress), "1" is added to the value of the right-hit error counter.
In step S8-2, a reserved number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the reserved number counter address setting process, the address of the reserved number counter for special drawing 2 is set in the reserved number counter address area of RAM 230.
In step S8-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special pattern random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special pattern random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, the process first proceeds to step S9-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S9-1, a special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special drawing reservation number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special drawing reservation number acquisition process, the value (special drawing 1 reservation number or special drawing 2 reservation number) of the special drawing reservation number counter (special drawing 1 reservation number counter or special drawing 2 reservation number counter) specified by the address set in the reservation number counter address area is acquired (loaded).

In step S9-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special symbol random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random value values) such as a jackpot random number, a winning symbol random number, a reach group random number, a reach mode random number, and a variable pattern random number are acquired (loaded) from the loop counters corresponding to each lottery. At this time, the corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether the number of reserved special drawings (number of reserved special drawings 1 or number of reserved special drawings 2) obtained in step S9-2 is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4") or not. If it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5. If it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings is the upper limit value (Yes), the process ends and the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5) is proceeded to.
In step S9-5, a special reserved number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special reserved number counter update process, the value set in the special reserved number counter (special reserved number counter 1 or special reserved number counter 2) specified by the address set in the reserved number counter address area is added with "1" and the value is set in the special reserved number counter.

In step S9-6, a special random number storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special random number storage process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in a special game information storage area (special game information storage area or special game information storage area) of the RAM 230 as special game information (special game information 1 or special game information 2).
The RAM 230 is composed of a memory area 0 in which special chart game information during game execution is stored, a special chart 1 game information memory area in which special chart 1 game information for which start judgment is pending is stored, and a special chart 2 game information memory area in which start judgment is pending.
The special chart 1 game information memory area is configured to include memory area 1 to memory area 4 as memory areas capable of storing special chart 1 game information.
The priority of each memory area is specified as memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, and memory area 4 (higher to lower) in order of priority. Then, the special game information stored in the special game information storage area is executed in order of priority from the memory area with the higher priority.
The special chart 2 game information memory area is configured to include memory area 1 to memory area 4 as memory areas capable of storing special chart 2 game information.
The priority of each memory area is specified as memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, and memory area 4 (higher to lower) in order of priority. The special game information stored in the special game information storage area is executed in order of priority from the memory area with the higher priority.

In the special symbol random number storage process, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special symbol 1 game information storage area as special symbol 1 game information. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area with the highest priority among the available storage areas.
That is, if the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "1", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 1. If the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 2. If the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 3. If the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 4.
On the other hand, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special symbol 2 game information storage area as the special symbol 2 game information. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area with the highest priority among the available storage areas.
That is, if the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "1", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 1. If the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 2. If the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 3. If the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 4.

In step S9-7, a reserved number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the reserved number designation command setting process, a reserved number designation command that designates that the reserved number of special symbols (reserved number of special symbols 1 or reserved number of special symbols 2) has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230. At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol drawing, a reserved number designation command that designates that the reserved number of special symbols 1 has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230, and if it is a value corresponding to the second special symbol drawing, a reserved number designation command that designates that the reserved number of special symbols 2 has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S9-8, a pre-determination process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5). In the pre-determination process, various lottery results are pre-determined based on the game information (special game information 1 or special game information 2) (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determination target game information") saved (stored) in the special game information storage area (special game information 1 or special game information storage area) in step S9-6.
In this embodiment, pre-determination of various lottery results is performed for all game information (special chart 1 game information and special chart 2 game information).
In addition, for game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of a jackpot game state, a configuration may be adopted in which a pre-determination of various lottery results is not performed. Also, for special chart 2 game information acquired (stored) during the stoppage of time-saving control, a pre-determination of various lottery results is not performed, and for special chart 1 game information acquired (stored) during the execution of time-saving control, a configuration may be adopted in which a pre-determination of various lottery results is not performed.

In the preliminary judgment process, first, a preliminary special drawing hit judgment process is executed.
In the pre-special pattern hit determination process, the result of the special pattern lottery ("jackpot" or "miss") is determined (pre-special pattern hit determination).
A special symbol winning/losing lottery table in which the jackpot value of the special symbol lottery is registered is stored in the ROM 220. In addition, as the special symbol winning/losing lottery table, a special symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to each combination of the setting value ("1" to "6") and the game state ("special symbol low probability state" or "special symbol high probability state") is stored.
Specifically, the special chart winning/losing lottery tables stored are a "setting value 1 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 1 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 2 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 2 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 3 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 3 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 4 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 4 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 5 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 5 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 6 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," and a "setting value 6 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table."

The "Setting value 0 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "0" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "0" (the "special chart low probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 0 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "204" are registered as the jackpot value out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535".
The "Setting value 0 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "0" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "1" (the "special chart high probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 0 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "2039" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
The "Setting value 1 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "1" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "0" (the "special chart low probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 1 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "209" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
The "Setting value 1 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "1" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "1" (the "special chart high probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 1 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "2089" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
The "Setting value 2 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "2" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "0" (the "special chart low probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 2 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "214" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
The "Setting value 2 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "2" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "1" (the "special chart high probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 2 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "2139" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.

The "Setting value 3 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "3" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "0" (the "special chart low probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 3 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "219" are registered as the jackpot value out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535".
The "Setting value 3 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "3" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "1" (the "special chart high probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 3 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "2189" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
The "Setting value 4 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "4" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "0" (the "special chart low probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 4 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "224" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
The "Setting value 4 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "4" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "1" (the "special chart high probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 4 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "2239" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
The "Setting value 5 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "5" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "0" (the "special chart low probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 5 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "229" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
The "Setting value 5 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "5" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "1" (the "special chart high probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 5 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "2289" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.

In the pre-special winning judgment process, the value set in the setting value area (setting value) and the current game state ("special winning/losing probability state" or "special winning/losing probability state") are confirmed, and the special winning/losing lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information and the special pattern win/lose lottery table that has been read, the result of the special pattern lottery ("jackpot" or "loss") is determined (pre-determination of special pattern win).
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information matches the jackpot value registered in the special pattern lottery table that has been read out, the result of the special pattern lottery is determined to be a "jackpot" (win).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information does not match the jackpot value registered in the special pattern winning/losing lottery table that was read out (if it matches the losing value), the result of the special pattern lottery is determined to be a "loser" (a loss).

In the advance determination process, next, advance special symbol determination process is executed. In the advance special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (advance special symbol determination).
In the pre-special pattern determination process, if the pre-special pattern hit determination determines a "jackpot" (win), the type of "jackpot pattern" is determined (pre-special pattern determination).
A jackpot symbol selection table in which the correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of "jackpot symbol" is registered is stored in the ROM 220. In addition, as the jackpot symbol selection table, a first jackpot symbol selection table corresponding to the first special symbol selection and a second jackpot symbol selection table corresponding to the second special symbol selection are stored.
In the first jackpot symbol selection table, "jackpot 1 symbol" and "jackpot 2 symbol" are registered as the types of "jackpot symbols". On the other hand, in the second jackpot symbol selection table, "jackpot 3 symbol" to "jackpot 6 symbol" are registered as the types of "jackpot symbols".
When the pre-determined game information is the special game information, the first jackpot symbol selection table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined game information and the first jackpot symbol selection table that has been read out.
On the other hand, when the pre-determined game information is the special game information 2, the second jackpot symbol selection table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read second jackpot symbol selection table.
On the other hand, in the advance special pattern determination process, if the advance special pattern hit determination determines that the winning pattern is a "miss" (failed), the type of the stopping pattern is determined to be a "miss pattern" (advance special pattern determination).

In the advance determination process, next, a first read-ahead designation command setting process is executed.
In the first pre-reading designation command setting process, a first pre-reading designation command that designates the type of the stopping pattern determined by the advance special pattern determination is stored in a sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In the preliminary judgment process, next, a preliminary special chart change mode judgment process is executed.
At this time, if the preliminary special chart hit judgment determines that the player has "lost" (lost the prize), the preliminary special chart change mode judgment process for when the player has lost the prize is executed, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the preliminary special chart hit judgment determines that the player has "won" (won the prize), the preliminary special chart change mode judgment process for when the player has won the prize is executed, which will be described later.

In the pre-selection process for determining the special chart variation pattern when a winner is not selected, a pre-selection random number type determination is first performed.
In the pre-random number type determination, it is determined whether the reach group random number included in the pre-determined game information is an "indefinite value" or a "fixed value."
Here, if the reach group random number included in the pre-determined game information is an "indeterminate value," the fluctuation mode number (primary fluctuation mode number) and the fluctuation pattern number are not determined when the game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is acquired (stored).
On the other hand, if the reach group random number included in the pre-determined game information is a "fixed value," the fluctuation mode number (primary fluctuation mode number) and the fluctuation pattern number are determined when the game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is acquired (stored) (when step S9-8 is executed).
In this embodiment, the value of the reach group random number is updated within the range of "0" to "10006." Of the range of "0" to "10006,""0" to "8499" are set as "indefinite values," and "8500" to "10006" are set as "fixed values."
Therefore, in the pre-random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determined game information is less than "8500", it is determined to be an "indefinite value", and if the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determined game information is "8500" or greater, it is determined to be a "fixed value".

In the pre-selection special chart fluctuation mode determination process when losing, if the pre-selection random number type determination determines it to be a "fixed value", then pre-selection reach group determination, pre-selection fluctuation mode determination when losing, and pre-selection fluctuation pattern determination are further performed.
In addition, in the pre-special chart fluctuation mode determination process when losing, if the pre-random number type determination is determined to be an ``indeterminate value,'' the pre-reach group determination, the pre-fluctuation mode determination when losing, and the fluctuation pattern determination when losing are not executed.

In the advance reach group determination, the reach group number (reach group type) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which the correspondence between reach group random numbers and reach group numbers (reach group types) is registered.
In addition, reach group determination tables corresponding to each combination of hold type (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), hold number ("0" to "3"), and game state (low probability state, time-saving state, high probability state, or potential probability state) are stored.
Here, in this embodiment, the game states defined are a low probability state, a time-saving state, a probability change state, and a potential probability state.
The "low probability state" is a game state in which a special chart low probability state is occurring and time-saving control is stopped. The "time-saving state" is a game state in which a special chart low probability state is occurring and time-saving control is being executed. The "probability state" is a game state in which a special chart high probability state is occurring and time-saving control is being executed. The "latent probability state" is a game state in which a special chart high probability state is occurring and time-saving control is being stopped.
In the advance reach group determination, first, the reserved type (type of game information to be pre-determined (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), the number of reserved items, and the game status are confirmed, and the reach group determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. At this time, the number of reserved items is assumed to be "0".
Then, the reach group number is determined based on the reach group random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read reach group determination table.

In the pre-failure fluctuation mode determination, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) is determined.
ROM 220 stores a fluctuation mode determination table in which the correspondence between reach mode random numbers and fluctuation mode numbers (types of fluctuation modes) is registered.
In addition, as the fluctuation mode determination table, a fluctuation mode determination table when losing and a fluctuation mode determination table when winning are stored.
Furthermore, as a loss-time fluctuation mode determination table, a loss-time fluctuation mode determination table corresponding to each reach group number (each type of reach group) is stored.
In particular, in each fluctuation mode determination table, a fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and a fluctuation pattern determination table (information specifying the fluctuation pattern determination table) are associated with each reach mode random number. This allows the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern determination table to be selected simultaneously based on each fluctuation mode determination table.
In the preliminary fluctuation mode judgment when a winning ticket is lost, first, the reach group number judged by the preliminary reach group judgment is confirmed, and the fluctuation mode judgment table when a winning ticket is lost corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read-out loss-time fluctuation mode determination table, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.

In the pre-fluctuating pattern determination when an election is lost, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined.
ROM 220 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table in which the correspondence between fluctuation pattern random numbers and fluctuation pattern numbers (types of fluctuation patterns) is registered.
In addition, a plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables having mutually different contents are stored as the fluctuation pattern determination table.
In the pre-fluctuating pattern determination when a candidate is rejected, first, the fluctuation pattern determination table determined by the pre-fluctuating mode determination when a candidate is rejected is read out.
Then, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read fluctuation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, in the process of determining the pre-selection special chart variation mode upon winning, first, a pre-selection variation mode determination is performed upon winning.
When a prize is won, the pre-fluctuating mode determination determines the fluctuating mode number (type of fluctuating mode).
In the pre-winning variation mode determination, first, the winning variation mode determination table is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determined game information and the winning time fluctuation mode determination table that has been read, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.

In the process of determining the pre-winning special chart variation mode, next, a pre-winning variation pattern determination is performed.
When determining the pre-variation pattern at the time of winning, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined.
In the pre-winning fluctuation pattern determination, first, the fluctuation pattern determination table determined by the pre-winning fluctuation mode determination is read out.
Then, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read fluctuation pattern determination table.

In the advance judgment process, next, second and third read-ahead designation command setting processes are executed.
In the second and third look-ahead designation command setting processes, if the preliminary special chart hit determination determines that the winning combination is a "miss" (lost), and the preliminary random number type determination determines that the combination is a "fixed value," a second look-ahead designation command specifying the fluctuation mode number determined by the preliminary fluctuation mode determination at the time of loss, and a third look-ahead designation command specifying the fluctuation pattern number determined by the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination at the time of loss are stored in the sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.
On the other hand, if the preliminary special winning judgment determines that the winning number is a "miss" (failed) and the preliminary random number type judgment determines that the winning number is an "undefined value," a second look-ahead specification command designating an "undefined value" and a third look-ahead specification command designating an "undefined value" are stored in the sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.
On the other hand, if the preliminary special winning judgment determines that a "jackpot" (win) has occurred, a second look-ahead designation command specifying the fluctuation mode number determined by the preliminary fluctuation mode judgment at the time of winning, and a third look-ahead designation command specifying the fluctuation pattern number determined by the preliminary fluctuation pattern judgment at the time of winning are stored in a sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.

As a result of the above, if the value of the reach group random number contained in the pre-determined game information is a ``fixed value,'' the fluctuation mode number and fluctuation pattern number are determined, and second and third pre-reading designation commands specifying the determined fluctuation mode number and fluctuation pattern number are sent to the performance control board 300.
On the other hand, if the value of the reach group random number contained in the pre-determined game information is an ``indeterminate value,'' the fluctuation mode number and fluctuation pattern number are not determined, and the second and third pre-reading designation commands specifying an ``indeterminate value'' are sent to the performance control board 300.

(Special game management processing)
Next, the special game management process in step S4-13 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special game management process.
In this embodiment, seven situations and stages (hereinafter referred to as "special game phases") of a game executed based on a special pattern lottery (hereinafter referred to as "special game") are defined: "state waiting for special pattern change,""state during special pattern change,""state displaying special pattern,""state before opening of large prize opening,""state controlling opening of large prize opening,""state enabling closure of large prize opening," and "state waiting for end of opening of large prize opening."
Then, in a special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven special game phases is set.
The ROM 220 also stores special game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) special games, which correspond to each special game phase.
In the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and processing based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, the process first proceeds to step S10-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S10-1, a special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, a value (special game phase) set in a special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, a special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read out.
In step S10-3, a special game control module execution process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, a process based on the special game control module read out in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value acquired in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special chart change waiting state", the special chart change waiting process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "special chart changing state", the special chart changing process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "special chart stopped pattern display state", the special chart stopped process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "pre-large prize opening state", the pre-large prize opening opening process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "large prize opening opening control state", the large prize opening opening control process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "large prize opening closure valid state", the large prize opening closure valid process described below is started; and if the value corresponds to the "large prize opening opening end wait state", the large prize opening opening end wait process described below is started.

(Waiting for special chart changes)
Next, the special chart change waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special chart change waiting process.
When the special chart change waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 20, the process first proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether the value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "1" or greater, and if it is determined that the value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is not "1" or greater (No), the process proceeds to step S11-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "1" or greater (Yes), the process proceeds to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether the value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "1" or greater, and if it is determined that the value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "1" or greater (Yes), the process proceeds to step S11-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is not "1" or greater (No), the process proceeds to step S11-16.

In step S11-3, a special drawing reservation number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special drawing reservation number update process, the special drawing reservation number (special drawing 1 reservation number or special drawing 2 reservation number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special drawing reservation number update process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special drawing 2 reservation number counter is "1" or greater.
Then, if the value of the special pattern 2 reserved number counter is "1" or more, the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is set to a value ("1" in this embodiment) that designates a game based on the special pattern 2 game information, and "1" is subtracted from the value of the special pattern 2 reserved number counter.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special chart 2 reserved number counter is not "1" or greater (the value of the special chart 2 reserved number counter is "0"), the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is set to a value designating a game based on the special chart 1 game information (in this embodiment, "0"), and "1" is subtracted from the value of the special chart 1 reserved number counter.
In step S11-4, a reserved number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the reserved number designation command setting process, a reserved number designation command that designates that the reserved number of special drawings has been decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Specifically, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "1", a reserved number designation command specifying that the reserved number of special pattern 2 has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.
On the other hand, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "0", a reserved number designation command specifying that the reserved number of special pattern 1 has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S11-5, a special symbol storage area shift process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the special symbol storage area shift process, the storage area in which the game information is stored is shifted.
Specifically, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "1", the storage contents of storage area 1 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of storage area 2 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area are shifted to storage area 1 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 3 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area are shifted to storage area 2 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 4 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area are shifted to storage area 3 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 4 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "0", the storage contents of storage area 1 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of storage area 2 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area are shifted to storage area 1 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 3 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area are shifted to storage area 2 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 4 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area are shifted to storage area 3 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 4 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area are cleared (initialized).

In step S11-6, a setting abnormality determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the setting abnormality determination process, occurrence of a setting abnormality is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is obtained. Next, it is determined whether the obtained setting value is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (in this embodiment, "6") or not.
Then, when it is determined that the acquired setting value is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (is equal to or greater than the predetermined setting comparison value), a value corresponding to the setting abnormal state is saved as the value (gaming machine state flag) of the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230. Also, a subcommand designating the occurrence of the setting abnormality is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-7).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired setting value is less than the predetermined setting comparison value, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-7).

In step S11-7, a special symbol winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special symbol winning determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special symbol winning determination).
In the special winning determination process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 and the current game state ("special winning/losing probability state" or "special winning/losing probability state") are confirmed, and the special winning/losing lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the jackpot random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the special pattern win/lose lottery table that has been read out, it is determined whether the result of the special pattern lottery is a "jackpot" or not (special pattern win determination).
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 matches the jackpot value registered in the special pattern winning/losing lottery table that has been read out, the result of the special pattern lottery is judged to be a "jackpot" (win).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in memory area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the special pattern winning/losing lottery table that has been read out (if it matches the losing value), the result of the special pattern lottery is judged to be a "loser" (a loss).

In step S11-8, a special symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (special symbol determination).
Specifically, in the special symbol pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol hit determination has determined that a "jackpot" (win) has occurred.
Then, if the special pattern hit judgment determines that there has been a "jackpot" (a win), the type of "jackpot pattern" is determined.
For this purpose, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "0", the first big win symbol selection table is read out. Then, the type of the big win symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the first big win symbol selection table that has been read out.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "1", the second jackpot symbol selection table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the read second jackpot symbol selection table.
On the other hand, if the special winning judgment results in a "miss" (failure), the type of the stopping pattern is judged to be a "missing pattern."
Next, a value corresponding to the type of the determined stopping symbol is set in a special symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-9, a symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the symbol type designation command setting process, the symbol type designation command that designates the type of the stopped symbol determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-10, a special symbol stop pattern number determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special symbol stop pattern number determination process, the stop pattern number of the special symbol is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop pattern number lottery table in which the correspondence between the winning pattern random number value and the stop pattern number (segment data) is registered.
In addition, as stop pattern number lottery tables, a winning stop pattern number lottery table corresponding to when the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery) is won, and a losing stop pattern number lottery table corresponding to when the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery) is lost are stored.
Furthermore, as winning time stop pattern number lottery tables, a winning time stop pattern number lottery table corresponding to the first special pattern lottery and a winning time stop pattern number lottery table corresponding to the second special pattern lottery are stored.
In the special symbol stop pattern number determination process, first, the result of the special symbol hit determination is confirmed.
When the special symbol hit judgment determines that the player has won the jackpot (a big win), the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is checked, and a winning stop symbol number selection table corresponding to the result of the check is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the winning stop symbol number selection table that has been read out.
On the other hand, when the special winning judgment results in a "loss" (loss), the lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of loss is read out. Then, the stop pattern number is determined based on the winning pattern random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of loss that has been read out.
Next, the determined stop symbol number is stored in a stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230.

In step S11-11, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the special symbol variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (type of variation mode and type of variation pattern) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, in the special chart change pattern determination process, first, the result of the special chart hit determination is confirmed. Then, if the result of the special chart hit determination is "miss" (losing), the process of determining the special chart change state when the player loses is executed, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the result of the special chart hit determination is "big hit" (winning), the process of determining the special chart change state when the player wins is executed, which will be described later.

In the process of determining the special chart change mode when a winner is defeated, a reach group determination is first performed.
In the reach group determination, the reach group number (reach group type) is determined.
In the reach group judgment, first, the reserved type (type of game information stored in memory area 0 (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), the number of reserved balls, and the game status are confirmed, and the reach group judgment table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, the type of the reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the reach group determination table that has been read out.
In the process of determining the special chart variation mode when the player loses the election, a variation mode determination when the player loses the election is then performed.
When determining the fluctuation mode at the time of losing, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.
In the loss-time variable mode judgment, first, the reach group number judged by the reach group judgment is confirmed, and the loss-time variable mode judgment table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the read-out loss-time fluctuation mode determination table, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.
In the process of determining the special chart fluctuation mode when losing, next, a fluctuation pattern determination when losing is performed.
When determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined.
In the case of determining the fluctuation pattern when losing, first, the fluctuation pattern determination table determined by the fluctuation mode determination when losing is read out.
Then, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the read fluctuation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, in the process of determining the special chart variation mode when a prize is won, first, a variation mode determination is performed when a prize is won.
When determining the fluctuation mode at the time of winning, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern table are determined.
In the winning time variation mode determination, first, a winning time variation mode determination table is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the winning time fluctuation mode determination table that was read out, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.
In the process of determining the special chart variation mode when a prize is won, next, a variation pattern determination is performed when a prize is won.
When determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of winning, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined.
In the winning time fluctuation pattern determination, first, the fluctuation pattern determination table determined by the winning time fluctuation mode determination is read out.
Then, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the read fluctuation pattern determination table.

In step S11-12, a fluctuation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-13. In the fluctuation pattern command setting process, a fluctuation mode designation command that designates the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) determined in step S11-11 is stored in a subcommand output request buffer.
In addition, a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) determined in step S11-11 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-13, a special symbol variation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-14. In the special symbol variation time setting process, the time for the variation display of the special symbol is set.
Specifically, in the special chart variable time setting process, first, the variable time (hereinafter referred to as "variable time 1") corresponding to the variable mode number determined in step S11-11 is obtained.
In addition, the fluctuation time (hereinafter referred to as "fluctuation time 2") corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number determined in step S11-11 is obtained.
Then, the total time of the acquired variable time 1 and variable time 2 is calculated, and the calculated total time is set in the special game timer.

In step S11-14, a special chart variable display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-15. In the special chart variable display data setting process, data for controlling the variable display of the special chart display device is set.
Specifically, in the special chart variable display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special chart display timer.
Next, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "0", a predetermined initial value is set in the special pattern 1 display counter. As a result, among a predetermined number of segments constituting the special pattern 1 display device, a segment corresponding to the value of the special pattern 1 display counter is controlled to be lit.
On the other hand, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "1", a predetermined initial value is set in the special pattern 2 display counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special pattern 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special pattern 2 display counter is controlled to be lit.

In step S11-15, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special game phase changing state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-16, a customer waiting setting process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the customer waiting setting process, a demonstration designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special chart change processing)
Next, the special chart change process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the processing during special chart change.
When the special chart change process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 21, the process first proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S12-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-4.
In step S12-2, it is determined whether the value of the special chart display timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special chart display timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special chart display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S12-3, a special chart variable display data update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special chart variable display data update process, data for controlling the variable display of the special chart display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special pattern change display data update process, when the first special pattern change display is being executed, the value of the special pattern 1 display pattern counter is incremented by "1". On the other hand, when the second special pattern change display is being executed, the value of the special pattern 2 display pattern counter is incremented by "1".

In step S12-4, a special chart stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the special chart stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special chart display device is set.
Specifically, in the special symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number memory area of RAM 230 is obtained.
Next, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "0", the acquired stop pattern number (data corresponding to the stop pattern number) is set as the value of the special pattern 1 display pattern counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special pattern 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop pattern number is controlled to light up (stop display).
On the other hand, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "1", the acquired stop pattern number (data corresponding to the stop pattern number) is set as the value of the special pattern 2 display pattern counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special pattern 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop pattern number is controlled to light up (stop display).

In step S12-5, a special symbol stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6. In the special symbol stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.
In step S12-6, a stop command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-7. In the stop command setting process, the stop command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a predetermined number (1 in this embodiment) is added to the value of the external information determination number counter.
In step S12-7, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special game stop pattern display state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Special map stopped processing)
Next, the special chart stop processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing processing while a special chart is stopped.
When the special drawing stop processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 22, it first proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S13-2, it is determined whether the type of the stopped pattern is a "jackpot pattern" or not, and if it is determined that the type of the stopped pattern is not a "jackpot pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-3, and if it is determined that the type of the stopped pattern is a "jackpot pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-6.
In step S13-3, it is determined whether or not time-saving control is being executed. If it is determined that time-saving control is being executed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-4. If it is determined that time-saving control is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S13-5.
Here, if "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area of RAM 230, it is determined that time-saving control is being executed, and if "0" is set, it is determined that time-saving control is not being executed.

In step S13-4, a time-saving control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the time-saving control management process, it is determined whether or not to end the time-saving control.
Specifically, in the time-saving control management process, first, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value of the time-saving counter is set as a new value of the time-saving counter.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0".
If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter is "0", then the time-saving control flag area of RAM 230 is set to "0" (time-saving control is stopped).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter is not "0", the time-saving control flag area of RAM 230 remains set to "1" (the state in which time-saving control is being executed is maintained).
In step S13-5, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to a "special game phase change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-6, a game status update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the game status update process, the game status is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, "0" is set in the special chart high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. Also, "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-7, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-8. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role 53a is set.
Special electric control tables corresponding to each type of "big win symbol" are stored in the ROM 220. Each special electric control table specifies the effective time for closing the big win opening, the closing time for the big win opening, the number of rounds of play, the number of opening/closing switches corresponding to each round of play, and the control data (solenoid control data, control time data) corresponding to each opening/closing switch.
In the special electric role control data setting process, a special electric role control table corresponding to the type of “jackpot pattern” determined in step S11-8 is read out, and the read out special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
Next, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is set to "0".

In step S13-8, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-9. In the opening time setting process, a special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer.
In step S13-9, an opening command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the opening command setting process, the opening command specifying the type of "jackpot symbol" determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. In addition, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [times]) is added to the value of the external information jackpot counter.
In step S13-10, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "big prize opening pre-open state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing before opening the big prize hole)
Next, the pre-opening process of the big prize opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the processing before the large prize opening is opened.
When the pre-opening process for the large prize opening is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S14-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S14-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S14-2, a special electric role continuous operation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric role continuous operation counter update process, the value set in the special electric role continuous operation counter is added with "1" and the new value is set in the special electric role continuous operation counter.
In step S14-3, a round start command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start command setting process, the round start command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a special electric role open/close switching count setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric role open/close switching count setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read the open/close switching count corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation count counter. The read open/close switching count is then set in the special electric role open/close switching count counter.
Next, the value of the special electric winning number counter is set to "0."
In step S14-5, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "big prize opening control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Special electric service opening and closing switching process)
Next, the special electric utility opening/closing switching process of steps S14-5 and S16-3 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special electric service opening/closing switching process.
When the special electric utility opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5 and S16-3, as shown in FIG. 24, the process first proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S15-2. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4).

In step S15-2, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric role 53a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control data setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read out solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the special electric role open/close switching count counter. Then, the read out solenoid control data (control data specifying whether to energize or stop energizing) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This starts the control of the special electric role solenoid 65 based on the set solenoid data, and the special electric role 53a is controlled to be in an open or closed state.

In step S15-3, a special electric control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control time setting process, the control time corresponding to the value of the special electric role open/close switch count counter is read out by referring to the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer.
In step S15-4, a special electric service opening/closing switching counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4). In the special electric service opening/closing switching counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is set as a new value in the special electric service opening/closing switching counter.

(Big prize opening control process)
Next, the special prize opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening control process.
When the special prize opening control process is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S16-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-3. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, the special electric utility opening/closing switching process (see FIG. 24) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether the value of the special electric winning count counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]), and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning count counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning count counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S16-5, the special prize opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the special prize opening control end process, the solenoid control data for specifying the power supply stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This causes the special electric role 53a to be controlled to the closed state.
In step S16-6, a special prize opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the special prize opening closing effective time setting process, a special prize opening closing effective time (interval time) is set in the special game timer by referring to the special prize opening closing effective time table set in the special prize opening closing effective time table area of the RAM 230.
In step S16-7, a round end command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end command setting process, the round end command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large prize opening closure valid state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Large prize gate closure effective processing)
Next, the big prize opening closing validity process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening closure validity process.
When the special prize opening closure activation process is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S17-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S17-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached a specified value. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S17-3. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-5.
Here, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and the number of rounds of play specified in the special electric role control table is obtained as a specified value to make a judgment.
In step S17-3, a special prize opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-4. In the special prize opening closing time setting process, a special prize opening closing time is set in the special game timer by referring to the special prize opening control table set in the special prize opening control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-4, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "big prize opening pre-open state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-5, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the ending time setting process, a special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer.
In step S17-6, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the ending designation command setting process, the ending designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-7, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is ended and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large prize opening end waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Wait processing for the end of the large prize opening)
Next, the waiting process for finishing opening the big prize opening, which is executed in step S10-3, will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the large prize opening.
When the waiting process for the completion of the large prize opening is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 27, the process first proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S18-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S18-2, a game status setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the game status setting process, a game status is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, the value of the special symbol high probability state flag in RAM 230 is set according to the type of stopping symbol (jackpot symbol).
At this time, if the type of the stopped symbol is "jackpot 1 symbol" or "jackpot 3 symbol" to "jackpot 5 symbol", "1" is set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, if the type of the stopped symbol is "jackpot 2 symbol" or "jackpot 6 symbol", "0" is set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, a predetermined number of time-saving times is set in the time-saving counter. At this time, if the type of the stopped symbol is "jackpot 2 symbol" or "jackpot 6 symbol", the predetermined number of time-saving times is set to 100 [times]. On the other hand, if the type of the stopped symbol is "jackpot 1 symbol" or "jackpot 3 symbol" to "jackpot 5 symbol", the predetermined number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 [times]. Also, "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, a value corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol is set in the previous jackpot symbol flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to a "special game phase change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Regular game management processing)
Next, the normal game management process in step S4-14 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process.
Here, in this embodiment, seven situations/stages (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phases") of a game executed based on a normal symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "normal game") are defined: "normal symbol change waiting state", "normal symbol changing state", "normal symbol stop symbol display state", "normal symbol electric device pre-opening state", "normal symbol electric device opening control state", "normal symbol electric device closure active state" and "normal symbol electric device opening end waiting state".
Then, in a normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set.
In addition, the ROM 220 stores normal game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) normal games, which correspond to each normal game phase.
In the normal game management process, a normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and processing based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, as shown in FIG. 28, the process first proceeds to step S19-1.
In step S19-1, a normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, a value (normal game phase) set in a normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, a normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, a normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S19-1 is read out.

In step S19-3, a normal game control module execution process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game control module execution process, a process based on the normal game control module read out in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value acquired in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal map change waiting state", the normal map change waiting process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal map changing state", the normal map changing process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal map stopped pattern display state", the normal map stopped process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature pre-opening state", the normal electric feature pre-opening process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature opening control state", the normal electric feature opening control process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature closing effective state", the normal electric feature closing effective process described below is started; and if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature opening end wait state", the normal electric feature opening end wait process described below is started.

(Waiting for normal chart changes)
Next, the normal map change waiting process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the process of waiting for a change in the map.
When the map change waiting process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 29, the process first proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether the value of the regular map reservation counter is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the regular map reservation counter is "1" or greater (Yes), the process proceeds to step S20-2. If it is determined that the value of the regular map reservation counter is not "1" or greater (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S20-2, a process for updating the number of reserved ordinary maps is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the process for updating the number of reserved ordinary maps, the number of reserved ordinary maps is updated.
Specifically, in the regular map pending number update process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the regular map pending number counter.
Next, the memory area in which the regular game information is stored is shifted. Specifically, the memory contents of memory area 1 of the regular game information memory area are shifted (moved) to memory area 0. Next, the memory contents of memory area 2 of the regular game information memory area are shifted to memory area 1 of the regular game information memory area. Next, the memory contents of memory area 3 of the regular game information memory area are shifted to memory area 2 of the regular game information memory area. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 of the regular game information memory area are shifted to memory area 3 of the regular game information memory area. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 of the regular game information memory area are cleared (initialized).

In step S20-3, a normal symbol winning/losing determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal symbol winning/losing determination process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined (normal symbol winning/losing determination).
A normal symbol winning/losing lottery table in which winning values of the normal symbol lottery are registered is stored in the ROM 220. In addition, as the normal symbol winning/losing lottery table, a normal symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to when the time-saving control is being executed and a normal symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to when the time-saving control is stopped are stored as the normal symbol winning/losing lottery table.
In the normal lottery table corresponding to the time-saving control being stopped, the winning value is registered so that the winning probability is a first probability (1/99 in this embodiment). On the other hand, in the normal lottery table corresponding to the time-saving control being executed, the winning value is registered so that the winning probability is a second probability (1/1 in this embodiment) higher than the first probability.
In the normal winning/losing determination process, a normal winning/losing determination is performed based on the winning random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 and a normal winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the current execution status (running or stopped) of the time-saving control.
Specifically, if the value of the winning random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 matches the winning value, the result of the normal pattern lottery is judged to be a "win" (a prize).
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 does not match the winning value, the result of the normal pattern lottery is judged to be a "miss" (lost).

In step S20-4, a normal stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal stop symbol determination process, the type of the normal stop symbol (stop symbol number) is determined (normal stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the normal winning/losing determination process, if the normal winning/losing determination determines that the winning symbol is a "win" (a prize), the type of the winning symbol (winning symbol number) is determined to be a "normal winning symbol."
On the other hand, if the normal winning/losing judgment results in a "lose" (failure), the type of stopping pattern (stopping pattern number) is judged to be a "losing pattern."
Next, the type of the determined stop symbol (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S20-5, a normal pattern variation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the normal pattern variation pattern determination process, the type of the normal pattern variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined (normal pattern variation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process, when the time-saving control is stopped, the type of normal map fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is determined to be the first type (in this embodiment, the type corresponding to a fluctuation time of 2.0 [s]).
On the other hand, when time-saving control is being executed, the second type (in this embodiment, the type corresponding to a fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) is determined as the type (fluctuation pattern number) of the normal fluctuation pattern.

In step S20-6, a normal game variable time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the normal game variable time setting process, a variable time corresponding to the type of normal game variable pattern (variation pattern number) determined in step S20-6 is obtained. The obtained variable time is then set in the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, a general map change display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the general map change display data setting process, data for controlling the change display of the general map display device is set.
Specifically, in the general map change display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the general map display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the normal map display pattern counter. As a result, among a predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device, the segments corresponding to the value of the normal map display pattern counter are controlled to be lit.
Next, a predetermined segment data is set as the segment data corresponding to the general map display device. As a result, among a predetermined number of segments constituting the general map display device, the segments corresponding to the set segment data are controlled to be lit.
In step S20-8, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game phase changing state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing during normal map fluctuations)
Next, the normal map change process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the process during normal map fluctuation.
When the normal map fluctuation process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 30, the process first proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether the value of the general map display timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the general map display timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-3, and if it is determined that the value of the general map display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S21-3, a process for updating the data for displaying the change in the map is executed, and the process is terminated to move to the next process (step S4-15). In the process for updating the data for displaying the change in the map, the data for controlling the change in the map display device is updated.
Specifically, in the regular map variation display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the regular map display pattern counter.

In step S21-4, a general map stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the general map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the general map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol memory area of the RAM 230 is obtained.
Next, the acquired stop pattern number is set as the value of the normal map display pattern counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal map display pattern counter is controlled to light up (stop display).
In step S21-5, a normal game stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the normal game stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal stop symbol display state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing during normal map suspension)
Next, the normal map stop processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the processing during normal map stop.
When the normal map stop processing is executed in step S19-3, the process first proceeds to step S22-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether the stopping pattern is a "normal winning pattern" or not, and if it is determined that the stopping pattern is not a "normal winning pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3, and if it is determined that the stopping pattern is a "normal winning pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to a "normal game phase change waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-4, a normal electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the normal electric role 52a is set.
A normal electric control table corresponding to the execution status (executing or stopped) of the time-saving control is stored in the ROM 220. Each normal electric control table specifies the time before the normal electric open, the effective time for closing the normal electric, the waiting time for the end of the open, the number of times of opening and closing, and the control data (solenoid control data, control time data) corresponding to each opening and closing.
In the ordinary electric control data setting process, an ordinary electric control table corresponding to the execution status (executing or stopped) of the time-saving control is read out, and the read ordinary electric control table is set in the ordinary electric control table area of RAM 230.
Next, the number of times of switching is read by referring to the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the number of times of switching is read and set in the normal electric role switching number counter. Also, the value of the normal electric role winning number counter is set to "0".

In step S22-5, a normal electric role release time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the normal electric role release time setting process, a normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined normal electric role release time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S22-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory pre-opening state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Pre-processing for opening normal electric devices)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
Figure 32 is a flowchart showing the processing before opening normal electric parts.
When the normal electric feature opening pre-processing is executed in step S19-3, the process first proceeds to step S23-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S23-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, a normal electric utility opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The normal electric utility opening/closing switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release control state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric service opening and closing switching process)
Next, the normal electric utility opening and closing switching process of steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the normal electric utility opening and closing switching process.
When the normal electric utility opening and closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 33, the process first proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S24-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4).
In step S24-2, a normal electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the normal electric role 52a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric role control data setting process, the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read out solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the normal electric role open/close switching count counter. Then, the read out solenoid control data (control data specifying whether to energize or stop energizing) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This starts the control of the normal electric role solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data, and the normal electric role 52a is controlled to be in an open or closed state.

In step S24-3, a normal electric control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric role control time setting process, the control time corresponding to the value of the normal electric role open/close switching count counter is read out by referring to the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, a normal electric service opening/closing switching counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4). In the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter is set as a new normal electric service opening/closing switching counter.

(Normal electric feature release control process)
Next, the normal electric feature release control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
Figure 34 is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature release control process.
When the normal electric feature release control process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 34, it first proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-3. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, normal electric utility opening/closing switching processing (see FIG. 33) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether the value of the ordinary electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 3 [balls]), and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric winning number counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, a normal electric component opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric component opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying the de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the normal electric component 52a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S25-6, a normal electric role closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the normal electric role closing effective time setting process, a normal electric role closing effective time is set in the normal game timer by referring to the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S25-7, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory closing valid state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric device closure effective processing)
Next, the normal electric feature closure validity process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature closure activation process.
When the normal electric feature closure activation process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 35, the process first proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S26-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S26-2, the open end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the open end wait time setting process, a normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined open end wait time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S26-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release end wait state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric device release end wait processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening end wait process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the opening of normal electric gimmicks.
When the normal electric feature release end wait process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 36, the process first proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S27-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, a normal game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to a "normal game phase change waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Performance display device control process)
Next, the performance display device control process in step S4-25 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the performance display device control process.
The performance display device control process is based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. In other words, the performance display device control process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device control process is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, the process proceeds to step S38-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S38-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM. In addition, the values of all stack pointers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S38-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.
In step S38-3, a total-out counter increment process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In the total count counter increment process, it is determined whether or not the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the total out counter is not incremented.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not a predetermined gaming state is being reached, and if it is determined that the predetermined gaming state is being reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-5, and if it is determined that the predetermined gaming state is not being reached (No), the process proceeds to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined gaming state" is a gaming state in which a "special chart low probability state" has occurred, the time-saving control is stopped, and a jackpot gaming state has not occurred.
In step S38-5, a normal out counter increment process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter increment process, it is determined whether or not the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the normal out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the normal out counter is not incremented.

In step S38-6, normal prize ball counter addition processing is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is added with "3", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of a game ball into the first start port 51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether the on state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is added with "1", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is not detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the on state of the right winning opening switch 105 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the right winning opening switch 105 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is incremented by "10", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of a game ball into the right other winning opening 54. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the right winning opening switch 105 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not incremented.
Next, it is determined whether or not the on state of the left prize entry port switch 106 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the left prize entry port switch 106 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is incremented by "10", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of game balls into the left other prize entry ports 55 to 57. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the left prize entry port switch 106 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not incremented.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether the value of the total out counter has reached a reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-8, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-9.
In this embodiment, the reference value is 60000×n (n=integer), where “n” is a value indicating the current interval, and is initially set to “1”.
In step S38-8, a section update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the section update process, first, the base ratio stored in base value buffer 1 of RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to base value buffer 2 of RAM 230 .
Next, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the normal out counter. Also, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the normal prize ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current interval, thereby updating the reference value.
In step S38-9, a base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal winning ball counter. The calculated base ratio is then stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230.
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal prize ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

In step S38-10, a base ratio display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 includes a discrimination segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, it is selected which base ratio is to be displayed, the base ratio for the current section or the base ratio for the previous section.
Then, when the display of the base ratio of the current section is selected, information indicating that this is the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and display data corresponding to the ones digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "b," LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "b," LEDs 49 to 56 display a number indicating the tens digit of the current base ratio, and LEDs 57 to 64 display a number indicating the units digit of the current base ratio.

On the other hand, if the display of the base ratio of the previous section is selected, information indicating that this is the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "c" is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and display data corresponding to the ones digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "b," LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "c," LEDs 49 to 56 display a number indicating the tens digit of the current base ratio, and LEDs 57 to 64 display a number indicating the units digit of the current base ratio.

In step S38-11, a register restoration process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-12. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S38-1 (the register values used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the stack pointer value saved in step S38-1 (the stack pointer value used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) are restored.
In step S38-12, an interrupt permission process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-26). In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released. This allows the execution of a power-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like.

(Various Effects Executed in Pachinko Machine 1)
Next, various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.

(Hold performance)
First, the hold effect (hold display) executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
In the pachinko machine 1, a hold performance is executed for each special chart game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) stored in the game information storage area (special chart 1 game information storage area and special chart 2 game information storage area).
The hold effect is an effect that suggests (notifies) that the notification display (start determination) of a special pattern based on the game information that is the subject of the hold effect (hereinafter referred to as ``hold effect subject game information'') is on hold, or that the notification display of a special pattern based on the hold effect subject game information is currently being executed.
In the reserved effect, a reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display areas b1 to b3.

Specifically, in the reserved pattern display area b2, display positions (display sections) at which the reserved pattern h is displayed are specified which correspond to each of the four memory areas (memory area 1 to memory area 4) of the special pattern 1 game information memory area.
In addition, in the reserved pattern display area b3, display positions (display sections) where the reserved pattern h is displayed are specified which correspond to each of the four memory areas (memory area 1 to memory area 4) of the special pattern 2 game information memory area.
In a reserved performance in which the special chart 1 game information is set as the target game information for the reserved performance, a reserved pattern h corresponding to the target game information for the reserved performance is displayed in the reserved pattern display areas b1 and b2.

In other words, during the period when the reserved performance target game information is stored in the special chart 1 game information memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) (the period from after the reserved performance target game information is acquired to before start determination is made based on the reserved performance target game information), the reserved pattern h corresponding to the reserved performance target game information is displayed in the reserved pattern display area b2.
At this time, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved performance target game information is displayed at a display position corresponding to the memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) in which the reserved performance target game information is stored.
On the other hand, during the period when the pending performance target game information is stored in memory area 0 (the period from after a start determination based on the pending performance target game information is executed to the end of the notification display of a special pattern based on the pending performance target game information), a pending pattern h corresponding to the pending performance target game information is displayed in the pending pattern display area b1.
On the other hand, in a reserved performance in which the special chart 2 game information is the reserved performance target game information, a reserved pattern h corresponding to the reserved performance target game information is displayed in the reserved pattern display areas b1 and b3.
In other words, during the period when the reserved performance target game information is stored in the special chart 2 game information memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) (the period from after the reserved performance target game information is acquired to before a start determination is made based on the reserved performance target game information), a reserved pattern h corresponding to the reserved performance target game information is displayed in the reserved pattern display area b3.
At this time, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved performance target game information is displayed at a display position corresponding to the memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) in which the reserved performance target game information is stored.
On the other hand, during the period when the game information for the reserved performance target is stored in memory area 0 (the period from after a start determination based on the game information for the reserved performance is executed to the end of the notification display of the special pattern based on the game information for the reserved performance), a reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information for the reserved performance is displayed in the reserved pattern display area b1.

For example, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored as special chart 1 game information in memory area 3 of the special chart 1 game information storage area, and when a pending performance targeting the special chart 1 game information is executed, upon start of the pending performance, a pending pattern h corresponding to the pending performance target game information is displayed at a display position corresponding to the memory area 3 of the pending pattern display area b2.
Thereafter, in response to the shifting of the memory area for storing the game information subject to the reserved performance from memory area 3 to memory area 2, the display area of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information subject to the reserved performance is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 3 to the display position corresponding to memory area 2.
In addition, in response to the memory area for storing the game information subject to pending performance being shifted from memory area 2 to memory area 1, the display area of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information subject to pending performance is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 2 to the display position corresponding to memory area 1.
Furthermore, in response to the memory area that stores the game information subject to the reserved performance being shifted from the special chart 1 game information memory area (memory area 1) to memory area 0, the display area of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information subject to the reserved performance is shifted from the reserved pattern display area b2 (display position corresponding to memory area 1) to the reserved pattern display area b1.
Then, in response to the end of the notification display of the special pattern based on the game information for the reserved performance, the display of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information for the reserved performance in the reserved pattern display area b1 is terminated, thereby terminating the reserved performance.

In this embodiment, the types of hold effects are defined as normal hold effects and hold notice effects.
The "normal hold effect" is a type of hold effect that does not suggest the result of a pre-determination (step S9-8) based on the game information for the hold effect.
In this embodiment, normal hold and special hold are defined as the types (modes) of the reserved pattern h.
In the normal hold effect, a normal hold is displayed as a hold pattern h corresponding to the game information subject to the hold effect.
A normal hold effect is started when the game information for the hold effect target (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is stored in the game information memory area (special chart 1 game information memory area or special chart 2 game information memory area), and is ended when the notification display of the special pattern based on the game information for the hold effect ends.

(Pre-order announcement)
The "reserved notice effect" is a type of pre-reading notice effect. In other words, the reserved notice effect is a type of reserved effect that suggests the result of the advance judgment (step S9-8) based on the predetermined game information by the state of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information.
In the following description, the special game information that is the target of the reserved notice performance is referred to as "reserved notice target game information." In addition, the reserved pattern h that corresponds to the reserved notice target game information is referred to as "pre-notification target reserved pattern hy."
In this embodiment, the hold notice effect is an effect that suggests the result of a preliminary special pattern determination based on the hold notice target game information (specifically, the possibility that it is a "jackpot pattern").
In addition, the hold notice performance may be configured to suggest the result of a preliminary special chart change pattern determination based on the hold notice target game information (specifically, the possibility of a "super reach change").
In the hold preview performance, a special hold is displayed as the preview target hold pattern hy.
In this embodiment, the following special hold modes (types) are defined: "blue hold,""greenhold,""purplehold," and "red hold."
In the hold preview performance, the state of the preview target hold pattern hy changes, and the state of the preview target hold pattern hy that is finally displayed suggests the result of the advance judgment based on the preview target game information (specifically, the possibility that a jackpot game state will occur).
Here, the probability of a jackpot for each type of special reserve is specified as follows, in order from highest to lowest probability of a jackpot: "red reserve,""purplereserve,""greenreserve," and "blue reserve" (high probability of a jackpot → low probability of a jackpot).
The "expected jackpot probability" refers to the possibility (degree) that a jackpot gaming state will occur when the mode in question is selected.

When the reserved notice performance is executed, one or more reserved change triggers and reserved change contents corresponding to each reserved change trigger are set. Then, in the reserved notice performance, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified changes according to the reserved change contents corresponding to the reserved change trigger in response to the arrival of each reserved change trigger.
The "reserved change trigger" is a trigger for changing the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified. Also, the "reserved change content" is a content for changing the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified.
In this embodiment, the hold change trigger is defined as the start of a change performance corresponding to each advance hold information, the start of a change performance corresponding to the hold notice target game information, etc. Then, when the hold notice performance is executed, one or more hold change triggers are set from among these hold change triggers.
In this embodiment, the hold notice performance is executed only for the special chart 1 game information out of the special chart 1 game information and the special chart 2 game information.

(Variable effects)
Next, the variable effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the following explanation, the first performance pattern z1 displayed in the first performance pattern display area a1 will be referred to as the "left pattern", the first performance pattern z1 displayed in the first performance pattern display area a2 will be referred to as the "middle pattern", and the first performance pattern z1 displayed in the first performance pattern display area a3 will be referred to as the "right pattern".
In this embodiment, while the variable performance (first half variable performance and second half variable performance) is being executed, the second performance pattern z2 is constantly displayed in a variable manner in the second performance pattern display area a4.

First, each aspect of the first half variable presentation will be explained.
In the pachinko machine 1, the following variation mode numbers are defined: a variation mode number corresponding to "no pseudo consecutive variation", a variation mode number corresponding to "pseudo consecutive 2 variation", and a variation mode number corresponding to "pseudo consecutive 3 variation".
In addition, the categories (types) of the first half change effect are defined as "no pseudo consecutive change effect", "pseudo consecutive 2 change effect", and "pseudo consecutive 3 change effect".
Furthermore, as a pattern (mode) belonging to each category of the first half variable performance, one pattern or multiple patterns with different performance contents are specified.
And, when the fluctuation mode number corresponding to "fluctuating without pseudo consecutive hits" is specified by the fluctuation mode specification command, "fluctuation without pseudo consecutive hits" is selected as the category of the first half fluctuation performance. On the other hand, when the fluctuation mode number corresponding to "fluctuating with pseudo consecutive hits 2" is specified by the fluctuation mode specification command, "fluctuating with pseudo consecutive hits 2" is selected as the category of the first half fluctuation performance. On the other hand, when the fluctuation mode number corresponding to "fluctuating with pseudo consecutive hits 3" is specified by the fluctuation mode specification command, "fluctuating with pseudo consecutive hits 3" is selected as the category of the first half fluctuation performance.

The "pseudo non-consecutive variable performance" is composed of a display performance in which a normal variable display of the first special pattern z1 is executed in each of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3.
The "normal variable display" is a display in which the type of first performance pattern z1 displayed at the lottery result display position of the first performance pattern display area a1 to a3 is changed sequentially at a constant tempo.
The "lottery result display position" is the position where the first performance pattern z1 is stopped and displayed during the stop performance.
Specifically, in the "pseudo non-consecutive variable performance", normal variable display of each pattern starts sequentially in the order of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern.

The "pseudo continuous variation performance"("pseudo continuous 2 variation performance" and "pseudo continuous 3 variation performance") is a performance in which the variation display of the first performance pattern z1 is executed multiple times in a simulated manner during the execution of one variation display of the special pattern. Specifically, the pseudo continuous variation performance is configured to include multiple pseudo variation performances.
Here, the "pseudo consecutive 2-change performance" is configured to include two pseudo-change performances. On the other hand, the "pseudo consecutive 3-change performance" is configured to include three pseudo-change performances.
Each pseudo-variation performance is composed of a display performance in which a normal variation display of the first special pattern z1 is executed in each of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3, and then a temporary stop display of the first performance pattern z1 is executed.
The "provisional stop display" is a pseudo stop display. Specifically, the provisional stop display is a display in which one type of first performance symbol z1 is moving in a predetermined manner (swinging, rotating, etc.) at the lottery result display position and remains there.
The "stop display" is a display in which one type of first performance pattern z1 remains stopped at the lottery result display position.
Specifically, in each pseudo-variation performance, normal variation display of each symbol is started in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and then provisional stop display of each symbol is executed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.
In particular, in each pseudo-variable performance, the combination of the first performance symbols z1 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3 is one of the combinations of "miss", "reach", and "chance". Here, in the final pseudo-variable performance, the combination of the first performance symbols z1 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the "reach", and a reach state is established.
A "miss" is a combination that is not included in the "jackpot patterns" (specifically, a combination in which the left, middle and right patterns do not match) (excluding certain combinations described below).
A "reach pattern" is a combination included in the "jackpot pattern" (specifically, a combination in which the left and right patterns are the same type).
A "chance eye" is a specific combination (e.g., a combination with a pattern such as "1, 2, 3") that is not included in the "jackpot pattern" (specifically, a combination in which the left, middle, and right patterns do not match).
The "reach state" is a state in which the first performance pattern z1 is provisionally displayed in two of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3, and the combination of the provisionally displayed first performance patterns z1 is a combination included in the "jackpot pattern."

Next, each aspect of the second half variable presentation will be explained.
In the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern numbers are defined as a variation pattern number corresponding to a "no reach variation", a variation pattern number corresponding to a "normal reach variation", and a variation pattern number corresponding to a "super reach variation".
In addition, the categories (types) of the latter half fluctuation effects are defined as "non-reach fluctuation effects", "normal reach fluctuation effects", and "super reach fluctuation effects".
Furthermore, as a pattern (mode) belonging to each category of the latter half variable performance, one pattern or multiple patterns with different performance contents are specified.
And when the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "non-reach fluctuation" is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, "non-reach fluctuation" is selected as the category of the latter half fluctuation performance. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "normal reach fluctuation" is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, "normal reach fluctuation" is selected as the category of the latter half fluctuation performance. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, "super reach fluctuation" is selected as the category of the latter half fluctuation performance.

The "no-reach variable performance" is an performance that is executed following the "no-pseudo consecutive variable performance".
In this embodiment, the "non-reach variable performance" includes a "non-reach variable performance (miss)" that is executed when the result of the special chart hit judgment is a "miss," and a "non-reach variable performance (jackpot)" that is executed when the result of the special chart hit judgment is a "jackpot."
The "no-reach variable performance"("no-reach variable performance (miss)" and "no-reach variable performance (jackpot)") is composed of a display performance in which the normal variable display of the first special pattern z1 is executed in each of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3.
Specifically, in the "non-reach variable performance", after the normal variable display of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern is executed, each pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern.
At this time, in the "non-reach variable performance (miss)", the combination of first performance patterns z1 that are temporarily displayed in the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 becomes a "miss pattern".
On the other hand, in the "non-reach variable performance (jackpot)", the combination of first performance symbols z1 that are temporarily displayed in the three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3 becomes a "jackpot symbol".

The "normal reach change effect" is an effect that is executed following the "pseudo continuous change effect"("pseudo continuous 2 change effect" and "pseudo continuous 3 change effect").
In this embodiment, the "normal reach change effect" is defined as a "normal reach change effect (miss)" that is executed when the result of the special chart hit determination is a "miss", and a "normal reach change effect (jackpot)" that is executed when the result of the special chart hit determination is a "jackpot".
A "normal reach change effect"("normal reach change effect (miss)" and "normal reach change effect (jackpot)") is an effect that is executed while a reach state is being formed, and is composed of a display effect in which, after teasing whether or not a "jackpot pattern" will be formed, the "jackpot pattern" does not form, or the "jackpot pattern" forms.
Specifically, in the "normal reach variable performance", during the period when the left and right symbols form a reach state, a reach performance image is displayed and then the center symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.
At this time, in the "normal reach variation effect (miss)", a middle pattern of a type different from the left and right patterns is temporarily displayed (the "jackpot pattern" is not formed).
On the other hand, in the "normal reach variation effect (jackpot)", a center pattern of the same type as the left and right patterns is temporarily displayed (a "jackpot pattern" is formed).
The "reach effect image" is an effect image that encourages the player to see that the center symbol of the same type as the left and right symbols is temporarily stopped (the "big win symbol" is established). In this embodiment, the reach effect image is an image in which a character included in the center symbol performs a predetermined action, and an image in which a predetermined effect is applied to the center symbol.

The "Super Reach Fluctuation Effect" is an effect that is executed following the "Pseudo Continuous Fluctuation Effect"("Pseudo Continuous 2 Fluctuation Effect" and "Pseudo Continuous 3 Fluctuation Effect").
In this embodiment, the "super reach variation effect" is defined as a "super reach variation effect (miss)" which is executed when the result of the special chart hit judgment is a "miss", and a "super reach variation effect (jackpot)" which is executed when the result of the special chart hit judgment is a "jackpot".
A "Super Reach Fluctuation Effect"("Super Reach Fluctuation Effect (Miss)" and "Super Reach Fluctuation Effect (Jackpot)") is an effect that is executed while a reach state is being formed, and after teasing whether or not a "jackpot pattern" will be formed, a display is executed which prevents the "jackpot pattern" from being formed, after which the display of the changing middle pattern is resumed, and then a display is executed which develops from the reach state to an advanced reach state, and again teasing whether or not a "jackpot pattern" will be formed, and then either the "jackpot pattern" is not formed or the "jackpot pattern" is formed.
The "developed reach state" is a state in which the two first special symbols z1 forming the reach state are displayed in a reduced size. In this embodiment, the left and right symbols forming the reach state are reduced and displayed at the top end of the display screen 31a, thereby forming the developed reach state. Note that the middle symbol is not displayed during the period in which the developed reach state is formed.
Specifically, in the "Super Reach Variable Performance", during the period when the left and right patterns form a reach state, the above-mentioned reach performance image is displayed, and then a middle pattern of a type different from the left and right patterns is displayed temporarily stopped, after which the variable display of the middle pattern resumes, after which a developed reach state is formed, and during the period when the developed reach state is formed, the developed reach performance image is displayed, and then the middle pattern is displayed temporarily stopped.
At this time, in the "Super Reach Variation Presentation (Miss)", a middle symbol of a type different from the left and right symbols is temporarily displayed (the "jackpot symbol" is not formed).
On the other hand, in the "Super Reach Variation Presentation (Big Hit)", a center pattern of the same type as the left and right patterns is temporarily displayed (a "Big Hit pattern" is formed).
The "development reach effect image" is an effect image that encourages the left and right symbols to be displayed as a temporary stop (a "jackpot symbol" is established). In this embodiment, a predetermined background image is displayed as the development reach effect image.

(Stop effect)
Next, the stopping effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "stop effect" is an effect that is executed while the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state.
In the stop performance, the first performance pattern z1 is displayed stopped in each of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3, and the second performance pattern z2 is displayed stopped in the second performance pattern display area a4.

(Main preview performance)
Next, the main preview performance executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "main preview performance" is a performance executed during each variable performance, and is a performance that suggests the result of the start judgment (special chart hit judgment, special chart pattern judgment, special chart variable pattern judgment, etc.) related to the variable performance. In this embodiment, various button previews (specifically, dialogue preview, story preview, hidden button preview, etc.) are specified as types of main preview performance.
The "button preview" is a presentation that uses an operating means such as the presentation button 5b. In particular, an operation-enabled state is set while the button preview is being executed. Then, during the period in which the operation-enabled state is set, operation of the operating means is made valid. On the other hand, during the period in which the operation-enabled state is released, operation of the operating means is made invalid. In particular, with the button preview, when operation of the operating means is detected while the operation-enabled state is set, the presentation mode changes accordingly.
The contents of the various button previews are explained below.

(Dialogue preview)
Fig. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a first dialogue preview image im1. Fig. 48 is a diagram showing the flow of dialogue preview.
"Dialogue preview" is a type of main preview performance that suggests the result of the start judgment (specifically, the possibility that a "jackpot" will be determined by the special chart hit judgment) based on its presentation mode. In particular, with dialogue preview, the presentation mode (presentation stage) changes step by step, and the expected probability of a jackpot is suggested by the final change in presentation mode (final presentation stage reached). In other words, with dialogue preview, the expected probability of a jackpot suggested by the presentation mode changes step by step.
The line preview is a button preview using the effect button 5b. That is, in the line preview, an effective operation state is set in response to the start of the line preview. In addition, the effective operation state is released in response to the establishment of any one of the following conditions: (1) a predetermined effective operation time has elapsed since the effective operation state was set, and (2) the number of times that the operation of the effect button 5b has been detected has reached a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 1 time). In particular, in the line preview, the performance mode changes in response to the release of the effective operation state. Furthermore, the line preview is terminated in response to the elapse of a predetermined result notification time from the release of the effective operation state.
In the following description, the period from when the operation valid state is set (the start of the dialogue preview) to when the operation valid state is released is referred to as the "operation valid period." Also, the period from when the operation valid state is released to when a predetermined result notification time has elapsed (the end of the dialogue preview) is referred to as the "result notification period."

Specifically, in the line preview, a first line preview image im1 is displayed on the display screen 31a during the valid operation period.
The "first line preview image im1" is an image with the content "a specific character utters a specific line." In the first line preview image im1, the aspect of the background image of the character and the line (in this embodiment, "color") suggests the probability of a big win.
In this embodiment, the types (modes) of background images of the dialogue preview images (first dialogue preview image im1, second dialogue preview image im2) are specified as "gold background", "red background", "blue background", and "white background". The jackpot expectation of each background image is specified as "gold background", "red background", "blue background", and "white background" in descending order of jackpot expectation (high jackpot expectation → low jackpot expectation).
Also, "Character A" to "Character F" are defined as the types of characters to be displayed in the dialogue preview images (first dialogue preview image im1, second dialogue preview image im2). Furthermore, lines corresponding to each of "Character A" to "Character F" are defined as the types of lines to be displayed in the dialogue preview images (first dialogue preview image im1, second dialogue preview image im2).
47, in the dialogue preview, during the valid operation period, a button icon B1 and a time bar T are displayed on the display screen 31a. Furthermore, in the dialogue preview, during the valid operation period, a suggestive effect A (lamp effect) is executed by the button lamp. Then, in the dialogue preview, the display of the button icon B1 and the execution of the suggestive effect A by the button lamp indicate to the player that the valid operation period is in progress (that the effect button 5b can be operated).
The "button icon B1" is an image (icon) that imitates the effect button 5b. The button icon B1 is an image (icon) that prompts the operation of the effect button 5b. In particular, in the dialogue preview, the "color" of the button icon B1 suggests the promotion expectancy.
The "promotion expectation" refers to the possibility (degree) that the presentation mode of the line preview will be promoted to a higher stage (a stage with a higher jackpot expectation) when the mode is selected. Specifically, the promotion expectation is the possibility (degree) that the jackpot expectation suggested by the second line preview image im2 will be improved (promoted) relative to the jackpot expectation suggested by the first line preview image im1.
The "time bar T" is an image (icon) that indicates the remaining time until the valid operation period ends.
The "Suggestion effect A" is an effect that suggests the expected degree of promotion. In the suggestion effect A, the button lamp is illuminated (lit) in the same "color" as the "color" of the button icon B1 displayed on the display screen 31a. As a result, in the dialogue preview, the "color" of the button icon B1 and the "illumination color" of the button lamp suggest the expected degree of promotion. Note that in the dialogue preview, the "color" of the button icon B1 and the "illumination color" of the button lamp may be configured to suggest the result of the start judgment (specifically, the expected degree of a jackpot).
In this embodiment, "red" and "white" are defined as the "colors" of the button icon B1 (the "light emitting colors" of the button lamp in suggestive performance A). The promotion expectancy of each "color" (each "light emitting color") is defined to be "red" followed by "white" (high promotion expectancy → low promotion expectancy) in descending order of promotion expectancy.
Furthermore, in the line preview, a second line preview image im2 is displayed on the display screen 31a during the result notification display period.
The "second line preview image im2" is an image with the content "a specific character utters a specific line." In the second line preview image im2, the aspect of the background image of the character and the line (in this embodiment, "color") suggests the probability of a big win.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 48, when the line preview starts, the operation valid period starts. Also, when the operation valid period starts, the display of the first line preview image im1, the button icon B1, and the time bar T starts on the display screen 31a, and the suggestion performance A by the button lamp starts. At this time, the "color" of the button icon B1 and the "light color" of the button lamp suggest the promotion expectation degree.
In the line preview, if a pressing operation of the effect button 5b is detected before a predetermined effective operation time has elapsed from the start of the effective operation period, the effective operation period ends accordingly. In addition, in response to the end of the effective operation period, the display of the first line preview image im1, the button icon B1, and the time bar T ends on the display screen 31a, and the suggestion effect A by the button lamp ends. In addition, in response to the end of the effective operation period, the display of the second line preview image im2 starts on the display screen 31a.
On the other hand, in the line preview, if a predetermined operation valid time has elapsed from the start of the operation valid period without detecting the pressing of the effect button 5b, the operation valid period ends accordingly. In addition, in response to the end of the operation valid period, the display of the first line preview image im1, the button icon B1, and the time bar T ends on the display screen 31a, and the suggestion effect A by the button lamp ends. In addition, in response to the end of the operation valid period, the display of the second line preview image im2 starts on the display screen 31a.
Then, in the line preview, the display of the second line preview image im2 is terminated on the display screen 31a in response to the passage of a predetermined result notification time from the end of the operation valid period. This ends the line preview.
In addition, in the dialogue preview, the display of the first dialogue preview image im1, the button icon B1, and the time bar T may be started before the start of the valid operation period.
In addition, the dialogue preview may be configured so that suggestive performance A is started by the button lamp in conjunction with the start of the valid operation period.
In addition, in the dialogue preview, when the "color" of the button icon B1 and the "light color" of the button lamp are different, the promotion expectation rate (or the jackpot expectation rate) may be configured to be the highest.
In addition, in the dialogue preview, the earlier the timing at which the pressing of the effect button 5b during the valid operation period is detected, the longer the display time of the second dialogue preview image im2 can be made, so that the presentation length of the dialogue preview can be constant regardless of the timing at which the pressing of the effect button 5b during the valid operation period is detected.
In addition, in the dialogue preview, a predetermined preview image may be displayed in response to detection of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the effective operation period, and after the display of the predetermined preview image, the display of the second dialogue preview image im2 may be started. In such a configuration, regardless of the timing at which the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the effective operation period is detected, the display time of the second dialogue preview image im2 may be kept constant, while the earlier the timing at which the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the effective operation period is detected, the longer the display time of the predetermined preview image may be, so that the presentation length of the dialogue preview is constant regardless of the timing at which the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the effective operation period is detected.

Next, a method for selecting and setting the content of the dialogue preview will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, when the execution of the dialogue preview is selected in the preview performance determination process (step S34-4) described later, the performance contents of the dialogue preview are selected and set by the method shown below.
That is, first, the content of the second dialogue preview image im2 is selected and set.
To do this, first, the type of background image of the second line preview image im2 (any of the types of "gold background", "red background", "blue background" and "white background") is selected based on the result of the special chart hit determination. Next, the type of character to be displayed in the second line preview image im2 (any of the types of "Character A" to "Character F") is selected. Next, the type of line to be displayed in the second line preview image im2 is selected. At this time, the line corresponding to the previously selected character is selected as the type of line to be displayed in the second line preview image im2. Then, the selected background image, character and line are set as the contents of the second line preview image im2.

Next, the content of the first dialogue preview image im1 is selected and set.
For this, first, the type of background image of the first line preview image im1 (any of the types of "gold background", "red background", "blue background" and "white background") is selected based on the type of background image of the second line preview image im2 selected earlier. At this time, as the type of background image of the first line preview image im1, a type with the same or lower jackpot expectation rate is selected with respect to the type of background image of the second line preview image im2 selected earlier. Next, the type of character to be displayed in the first line preview image im1 (any of the types of "Character A" to "Character F") is selected. Next, the type of lines to be displayed in the first line preview image im1 is selected. At this time, the lines corresponding to the character selected earlier are selected as the type of lines to be displayed in the first line preview image im1. Then, the selected background image, character and lines are set as the contents of the first line preview image im1.
Next, the "color" of the button icon B1 and the "light color" of the button lamp in the suggestion performance A are selected and set.
To do this, first, the "color" of the button icon B1 ("red" or "white") is selected based on the type of background image of the first dialogue preview image im1 selected earlier and the type of background image of the second dialogue preview image im2 selected earlier (based on whether the background image type has been upgraded). Next, the same "light color" as the "color" of the button icon B1 selected earlier is selected as the "light color" of the button lamp in suggestion performance A. The selected "color" is then set as the "color" of the button icon B1, and the selected "light color" is set as the "light color" of the button lamp in suggestion performance A.
The content of the dialogue preview is set as described above.

(Story preview)
Fig. 49 is a diagram showing an example of a first-stage story image im3. Fig. 50 is a diagram showing the flow of a story preview.
The "Story Preview" is a type of main preview performance that suggests the result of the start judgment (specifically, the possibility of a "jackpot" being judged by the special chart hit judgment) based on its presentation mode. In particular, in the Story Preview, the presentation mode (presentation stage) develops step by step, and the expected probability of a jackpot is suggested based on the final development presentation mode (final reached presentation stage).
In this embodiment, the types (modes) of story previews are defined as "one-step story preview,""two-step story preview," and "three-step story preview." The jackpot expectancies for each type of story preview are defined as "three-step story preview,""two-step story preview," and "one-step story preview" (high jackpot expectancy → low jackpot expectancy) in descending order of jackpot expectancy.

The story preview is a button preview using the effect button 5b.
That is, in the "one-stage story preview", the first operation valid state is set in response to the passage of the first story time from the start of the "one-stage story preview". Also, the first operation valid state is released in response to the establishment of any one of the following conditions: (1) a predetermined first operation valid time has elapsed since the setting of the first operation valid state, and (2) the number of times that the operation of the performance button 5b has been detected has reached a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 1 time). In particular, in the "one-stage story preview", the performance mode changes in response to the release of the first operation valid state. Furthermore, the "one-stage story preview" is ended in response to the passage of a predetermined second story time from the release of the first operation valid state.
In the following description, the period from the start of a "one-stage story preview" to the elapse of the first story time is referred to as the "first story period." Additionally, the period from the setting of the first valid operation state to the release of the first valid operation state is referred to as the "first valid operation period." Additionally, the period from the release of the first valid operation state to the elapse of the second story time (the end of the "one-stage story preview") is referred to as the "second story period."
In the "first stage story preview", the first stage story image im3 is displayed on the display screen 31a throughout the first story period and the first operation valid period.
The "first stage story image im3" is a moving image having a predetermined story (hereinafter, "first stage story"). Specifically, the first stage story image im3 is a moving image having a content of "a predetermined character walking toward the entrance of the fighting arena and stopping in front of the entrance."
Also, as shown in Figure 49, in the "one-stage story preview", during the first operation valid period, the button icon B2 and the time bar T are displayed on the display screen 31a. Furthermore, in the "one-stage story preview", during the first operation valid period, a suggestive effect B (lamp effect) is executed by the button lamp. And, in the "one-stage story preview", the display of the button icon B2 and the execution of the suggestive effect B by the button lamp indicate to the player that the first operation valid period is in progress (that the effect button 5b can be operated).
The "button icon B2" is an image (icon) that imitates the effect button 5b. The button icon B2 is an image (icon) that prompts the player to operate the effect button 5b. In particular, in the story preview, the "color" of the button icon B2 suggests the expected degree of development.
The "expected degree of development" refers to the possibility (degree) that the story of the story preview will develop to the next stage when the mode is selected.
The "Suggestion Effect B" is an effect that suggests the expected degree of development. In the suggestion effect B, the button lamp is illuminated (lit) in the same "color" as the "color" of the button icon B2 displayed on the display screen 31a. As a result, in the story preview, the "color" of the button icon B2 and the "illumination color" of the button lamp suggest the expected degree of development. Note that in the story preview, the "color" of the button icon B2 and the "illumination color" of the button lamp may be configured to suggest the result of the start judgment (specifically, the expected degree of a jackpot).
In this embodiment, "red" and "white" are defined as the "color" of the button icon B2 (the "light color" of the button lamp in the suggestion performance B). The development expectancy of each "color" is defined to be "red" and "white" in order of high development expectancy (high development expectancy → low development expectancy).
Furthermore, in the "one-stage story preview", a story end image A is displayed on the display screen 31a during the second story period.
The "story end image A" is a moving image that suggests (notifies) that the story will not develop. Specifically, the story end image A is a moving image showing that "the entrance door to the fighting arena closes."

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(a), in response to the start of the "first stage story preview," the display of a first stage story image im3 starts on the display screen 31a.
In the "first-stage story preview," the first operation valid period starts as a predetermined first story time elapses from the start of the "first-stage story preview." In addition, in response to the start of the first operation valid period, the display of the button icon B2 and the time bar T starts on the display screen 31a, and suggestive performance B starts with the button lamp. At this time, the "color" of the button icon B2 and the "light color" of the button lamp suggest the possibility that the story will progress to the next stage.
In the "first-stage story preview," if a press of the effect button 5b is detected before a predetermined first-operation valid time has elapsed from the start of the first operation valid period, the first operation valid period ends accordingly. In addition, in response to the end of the first operation valid period, the display of the first-stage story image im3, button icon B2, and time bar T ends on the display screen 31a, and the suggestive effect B by the button lamp ends. In addition, in response to the end of the first operation valid period, the display of the story end image A starts on the display screen 31a.
On the other hand, in the "first-stage story preview", if a predetermined first-operation valid time has elapsed since the start of the first operation valid period without detecting a press of the effect button 5b, the first operation valid period ends accordingly. In addition, in response to the end of the first operation valid period, the display of the first-stage story image im3, button icon B2, and time bar T ends on the display screen 31a, and the suggestive effect B by the button lamp ends. In addition, in response to the end of the first operation valid period, the display of the story end image A starts on the display screen 31a.
Then, in the "one-stage story preview", the display of the story end image A is terminated on the display screen 31a in response to the passage of a predetermined second story time from the end of the first operation valid period. This ends the "one-stage story preview".

In the "two-stage story preview", the first operation valid state is set in response to the passage of the first story time from the start of the "two-stage story preview". In addition, the first operation valid state is released in response to the establishment of any one of the following conditions: (1) a predetermined first operation valid time has elapsed since the setting of the first operation valid state, and (2) the number of times that the operation of the performance button 5b has been detected has reached a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). In particular, in the "two-stage story preview", the performance mode changes (the story develops) in response to the cancellation of the first operation valid state. In addition, the second operation valid state is set in response to the passage of a predetermined second story time from the cancellation of the first operation valid state. In addition, the second operation valid state is released in response to the establishment of any one of the following conditions: (1) a predetermined second operation valid time has elapsed since the setting of the second operation valid state, and (2) the number of times that the operation of the performance button 5b has been detected has reached a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). In particular, in the "two-stage story preview", the performance mode changes in response to the cancellation of the second operation valid state. Furthermore, when a predetermined third story time has elapsed since the second operation valid state was released, the "two-stage story preview" is ended.
In the following explanation, the period from the start of a "two-stage story preview" to the elapse of the first story time is referred to as the "first story period." The period from the setting of the first valid operation state to the release of the first valid operation state is referred to as the "first valid operation period." The period from the release of the first valid operation state to the elapse of the second story time is referred to as the "second story period." The period from the setting of the second valid operation state to the release of the second valid operation state is referred to as the "second valid operation period." The period from the release of the second valid operation state to the elapse of the third story time (the end of the "two-stage story preview") is referred to as the "third story period."
In the "two-stage story preview", a first-stage story image im3 is displayed on the display screen 31a throughout the first story period and the first operation valid period.
Furthermore, in the "two-stage story preview", during the first operation valid period, the button icon B2 and the time bar T are displayed on the display screen 31a. Furthermore, in the "two-stage story preview", during the first operation valid period, a suggestive performance B is executed by the button lamp. And, in the "two-stage story preview", the display of the button icon B2 and the execution of the suggestive performance B by the button lamp indicate that the first operation valid period is in progress (that the performance button 5b can be operated).
Furthermore, in the "two-stage story preview", a second-stage story image im4 is displayed on the display screen 31a throughout the second story period and the second effective operation period.
The "second stage story image im4" is a moving image with the content of a story that develops from the first stage story (hereinafter, referred to as the "second stage story"). Specifically, the second stage story image im4 is a moving image with the content of "a specific character enters the arena from the entrance and walks to the center of the arena."
Furthermore, in the "two-stage story preview", during the second operation valid period, the button icon B2 and the time bar T are displayed on the display screen 31a. Furthermore, in the "two-stage story preview", during the second operation valid period, a suggestive performance B is executed by the button lamp. And, in the "two-stage story preview", the display of the button icon B2 and the execution of the suggestive performance B by the button lamp indicate that the second operation valid period is in progress (that the performance button 5b can be operated).
Furthermore, in the "two-stage story preview", a story end image B is displayed on the display screen 31a during the third story period.
The "story end image B" is a moving image that suggests (informs) that the story will not develop. Specifically, the story end image B is a moving image showing that "a specific character does not face an opponent in the center of the fighting arena."

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(b), in the "two-stage story preview", upon its start, a first-stage story image im3 starts to be displayed on the display screen 31a.
In the "two-stage story preview", the first operation valid period starts according to the passage of a predetermined first story time from the start of the "two-stage story preview". In addition, according to the start of the first operation valid period, the display of the button icon B2 and the time bar T starts on the display screen 31a, and the suggestive performance B by the button lamp starts. At this time, the "color" of the button icon B2 and the "light color" of the button lamp suggest the possibility that the story will progress to the next stage.
In the "two-stage story preview," if a press of the effect button 5b is detected before a predetermined first operation valid time has elapsed from the start of the first operation valid period, the first operation valid period ends accordingly. In addition, in response to the end of the first operation valid period, the display of the first-stage story image im3, button icon B2, and time bar T ends on the display screen 31a, and the suggestive effect B by the button lamp ends. In addition, in response to the end of the first operation valid period, the display of the second-stage story image im4 starts on the display screen 31a.
On the other hand, in the "two-stage story preview", if a predetermined first operation valid time has elapsed since the start of the first operation valid period without detecting a press of the effect button 5b, the first operation valid period ends accordingly. Also, in response to the end of the first operation valid period, the display of the first-stage story image im3, button icon B2, and time bar T ends on the display screen 31a, and the suggestive effect B by the button lamp ends. Furthermore, in response to the end of the first operation valid period, the display of the second-stage story image im4 starts on the display screen 31a.
In the "two-stage story preview", the second operation valid period starts according to the passage of a predetermined second story time from the end of the first operation valid period. Also, according to the start of the second operation valid period, the display of the button icon B2 and the time bar T starts on the display screen 31a, and the suggestive performance B by the button lamp starts. At this time, the "color" of the button icon B2 and the "light color" of the button lamp suggest the possibility that the story will progress to the next stage.
In the "two-stage story preview," if a press of the effect button 5b is detected before a predetermined second operation valid time has elapsed from the start of the second operation valid period, the second operation valid period ends accordingly. In addition, in response to the end of the second operation valid period, the display of the second-stage story image im4, button icon B2, and time bar T ends on the display screen 31a, and the suggestive effect B by the button lamp ends. In addition, in response to the end of the second operation valid period, the display of the story end image B starts on the display screen 31a.
On the other hand, in the "two-stage story preview", if a predetermined second operation valid time has elapsed from the start of the second operation valid period without detecting the pressing of the effect button 5b, the second operation valid period ends accordingly. In addition, in response to the end of the second operation valid period, the display of the second-stage story image im4, button icon B2, and time bar T ends on the display screen 31a, and the suggestive effect B by the button lamp ends. In addition, in response to the end of the second operation valid period, the display of the story end image B starts on the display screen 31a.
Then, in the "two-stage story preview", the display of the story end image B is terminated on the display screen 31a in response to the passage of a predetermined third story time from the end of the second operation valid period. This ends the "two-stage story preview".

In the "three-stage story preview", the first operation valid state is set in response to the passage of the first story time from the start of the preview. In addition, the first operation valid state is released in response to the establishment of any one of the following conditions: (1) a predetermined first operation valid time has elapsed since the setting of the first operation valid state, and (2) the number of times that the operation of the performance button 5b has been detected has reached a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). In particular, in the "three-stage story preview", the performance mode changes (the story develops) in response to the cancellation of the first operation valid state. In addition, the second operation valid state is set in response to the passage of a predetermined second story time from the cancellation of the first operation valid state. In addition, the second operation valid state is released in response to the establishment of any one of the following conditions: (1) a predetermined second operation valid time has elapsed since the setting of the second operation valid state, and (2) the number of times that the operation of the performance button 5b has been detected has reached a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). In particular, in the "three-stage story preview", the performance mode changes (the story develops) in response to the cancellation of the second operation valid state. Furthermore, when a predetermined third story time has elapsed since the second operation valid state was released, the "three-stage story preview" is ended.
In the following explanation, the period from the start of a "three-stage story preview" to the elapse of the first story time is referred to as the "first story period." The period from the setting of the first valid operation state to the release of the first valid operation state is referred to as the "first valid operation period." The period from the release of the first valid operation state to the elapse of the second story time is referred to as the "second story period." The period from the setting of the second valid operation state to the release of the second valid operation state is referred to as the "second valid operation period." The period from the release of the second valid operation state to the elapse of the third story time (the end of the "three-stage story preview") is referred to as the "third story period."
In the "three-stage story preview", a first-stage story image im3 is displayed on the display screen 31a throughout the first story period and the first operation valid period.
Furthermore, in the "three-stage story preview", during the first operation valid period, the button icon B2 and the time bar T are displayed on the display screen 31a. Furthermore, in the "three-stage story preview", during the first operation valid period, a suggestive performance B is executed by the button lamp. And, in the "three-stage story preview", the display of the button icon B2 and the execution of the suggestive performance B by the button lamp indicate that the first operation valid period is in progress (that the performance button 5b can be operated).
Furthermore, in the "three-stage story preview", the second-stage story image im4 is displayed on the display screen 31a throughout the second story period and the second effective operation period.
Furthermore, in the "three-stage story preview", during the second operation valid period, the button icon B2 and the time bar T are displayed on the display screen 31a. Furthermore, in the "three-stage story preview", during the second operation valid period, a suggestive performance B is executed by the button lamp. And, in the "three-stage story preview", the display of the button icon B2 and the execution of the suggestive performance B by the button lamp indicate that the second operation valid period is in progress (that the performance button 5b can be operated).
Furthermore, in the "three-stage story preview", a third-stage story image im5 is displayed on the display screen 31a during the third story period.
The "third stage story image im5" is a moving image having a story content that develops from the second stage story. Specifically, the third stage story image im5 is a moving image having a content of "a predetermined character confronting an opponent in the center of a fighting arena."

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(c), in the "three-stage story preview," the display of a first-stage story image im3 starts on the display screen 31a in response to the start of the "three-stage story preview."
In the "three-stage story preview," the first operation valid period starts according to the passage of a predetermined first story time from the start of the "three-stage story preview." In addition, according to the start of the first operation valid period, the display of the button icon B2 and the time bar T starts on the display screen 31a, and the suggestive performance B by the button lamp starts. At this time, the "color" of the button icon B2 and the "light color" of the button lamp suggest the possibility that the story will progress to the next stage.
In the "three-stage story preview," if a press of the effect button 5b is detected before a predetermined first operation valid time has elapsed from the start of the first operation valid period, the first operation valid period ends accordingly. In addition, in response to the end of the first operation valid period, the display of the first-stage story image im3, button icon B2, and time bar T ends on the display screen 31a, and the suggestive effect B by the button lamp ends. In addition, in response to the end of the first operation valid period, the display of the second-stage story image im4 starts on the display screen 31a.
On the other hand, in the "three-stage story preview," if a predetermined first operation valid time has elapsed since the start of the first operation valid period without detecting a press of the effect button 5b, the first operation valid period ends accordingly. In addition, in response to the end of the first operation valid period, the display of the first-stage story image im3, button icon B2, and time bar T ends on the display screen 31a, and the suggestive effect B by the button lamp ends. In addition, in response to the end of the first operation valid period, the display of the second-stage story image im4 starts on the display screen 31a.
In the "three-stage story preview," the second operation valid period begins in response to the passage of a predetermined second story time from the end of the first operation valid period. In response to the start of the second operation valid period, the display of the button icon B2 and the time bar T begins on the display screen 31a, and suggestive performance B begins with the button lamp. At this time, the "color" of the button icon B2 and the "illuminated color" of the button lamp suggest the possibility that the story will progress to the next stage.
In the "three-stage story preview," if a press of the effect button 5b is detected before a predetermined second operation valid time has elapsed from the start of the second operation valid period, the second operation valid period ends accordingly. In addition, in response to the end of the second operation valid period, the display of the second-stage story image im4, button icon B2, and time bar T ends on the display screen 31a, and the suggestive effect B by the button lamp ends. In addition, in response to the end of the second operation valid period, the display of the third-stage story image im5 starts on the display screen 31a.
On the other hand, in the "three-stage story preview," if a predetermined second operation valid time has elapsed since the start of the second operation valid period without detecting a press of the effect button 5b, the second operation valid period ends accordingly. In addition, in response to the end of the second operation valid period, the display of the second-stage story image im4, button icon B2, and time bar T ends on the display screen 31a, and the suggestive effect B by the button lamp ends. In addition, in response to the end of the second operation valid period, the display of the third-stage story image im5 starts on the display screen 31a.
Then, in the "three-stage story preview", the display of the third-stage story image im5 is terminated on the display screen 31a in response to the passage of a predetermined third story time from the end of the second operation valid period. This ends the "three-stage story preview".
In addition, in the case of story previews ("one-stage story preview,""two-stage story preview," and "three-stage story preview"), the display of button icon B2 and time bar T may be configured to start before the start of the valid operation period (first valid operation period or second valid operation period).
In addition, in the case of story previews ("one-stage story preview,""two-stage story preview," and "three-stage story preview"), the configuration may be such that suggestive effect B is started by the button lamp in conjunction with the start of the valid operation period (first valid operation period or second valid operation period).
In addition, in the "one-step story preview", the earlier the timing at which the pressing operation of the performance button 5b is detected during the first operation valid period, the longer the display time of the story end image A, so that the performance length of the "one-step story preview" is constant, regardless of the timing at which the pressing operation of the performance button 5b is detected during the first operation valid period. Alternatively, in the "one-step story preview", a predetermined preview image may be displayed in response to detection of the pressing operation of the performance button 5b during the first operation valid period, and the display of the story end image A may be started after the display of the predetermined preview image. With such a configuration, the display time of the story end image A may be constant, regardless of the timing at which the pressing operation of the performance button 5b is detected during the first operation valid period, while the earlier the timing at which the pressing operation of the performance button 5b is detected during the first operation valid period, the longer the display time of the predetermined preview image, so that the performance length of the "one-step story preview" is constant, regardless of the timing at which the pressing operation of the performance button 5b is detected during the first operation valid period.
Also, in the "two-stage story preview", the earlier the timing at which the pressing operation of the performance button 5b is detected during the first operation valid period, the longer the display time of the second-stage story image im4 is made, and the earlier the timing at which the pressing operation of the performance button 5b is detected during the second operation valid period, the longer the display time of the story end image B is made, so that the performance length of the "two-stage story preview" is constant regardless of the timing at which the pressing operation of the performance button 5b is detected during the operation valid period (first operation valid period and second operation valid period). Alternatively, in the "two-stage story preview", a predetermined preview image is displayed in response to detection of the pressing operation of the performance button 5b during the first operation valid period, and after the display of the predetermined preview image, the display of the second-stage story image im4 is started, and, in response to detection of the pressing operation of the performance button 5b during the second operation valid period, a predetermined preview image is displayed in response to detection of the pressing operation of the performance button 5b during the second operation valid period, and after the display of the predetermined preview image, the display of the story end image B is started. With this configuration, the display time of the second-stage story image im4 is kept constant regardless of the timing at which the pressing of the performance button 5b is detected during the first valid operation period, while the display time of the specified preview image is lengthened the earlier the pressing of the performance button 5b is detected during the first valid operation period, and the display time of the story end image B is kept constant regardless of the timing at which the pressing of the performance button 5b is detected during the second valid operation period, while the display time of the specified preview image is lengthened the earlier the pressing of the performance button 5b is detected during the second valid operation period, thereby making it possible to configure the performance length of the ``two-stage story preview'' to be constant regardless of the timing at which the pressing of the performance button 5b is detected during the valid operation periods (first valid operation period and second valid operation period).
Also, in the "three-stage story preview", the earlier the timing at which the pressing operation of the performance button 5b is detected during the first operation valid period, the longer the display time of the second-stage story image im4 is made, and the earlier the timing at which the pressing operation of the performance button 5b is detected during the second operation valid period, the longer the display time of the third-stage story image im5 is made, so that the performance length of the "three-stage story preview" is constant regardless of the timing at which the pressing operation of the performance button 5b is detected during the operation valid period (first operation valid period and second operation valid period). Alternatively, in the "three-stage story preview", a predetermined preview image is displayed in response to detection of the pressing operation of the performance button 5b during the first operation valid period, and after the display of the predetermined preview image, the display of the second-stage story image im4 is started, and, in response to detection of the pressing operation of the performance button 5b during the second operation valid period, a predetermined preview image is displayed in response to detection of the pressing operation of the performance button 5b during the second operation valid period, and after the display of the predetermined preview image, the display of the third-stage story image im5 is started. With this configuration, the display time of the second-stage story image im4 is kept constant regardless of the timing at which the pressing of the performance button 5b is detected during the first valid operation period, while the display time of the specified preview image is lengthened the earlier the pressing of the performance button 5b is detected during the first valid operation period; and the display time of the third-stage story image im5 is kept constant regardless of the timing at which the pressing of the performance button 5b is detected during the second valid operation period, while the display time of the specified preview image is lengthened the earlier the pressing of the performance button 5b is detected during the second valid operation period, thereby making it possible to configure the presentation length of the ``three-stage story preview'' to be constant regardless of the timing at which the pressing of the performance button 5b is detected during the valid operation periods (first valid operation period and second valid operation period).
In addition, in the story previews ("one-stage story preview", "two-stage story preview" and "three-stage story preview"), the state (shape) of the button icon B2 may be changed every time the presentation state changes. For example, the state of the button icon B2 may be defined as a state corresponding to a first-stage story image im3, a state corresponding to a second-stage story image im4, and a state corresponding to a third-stage story image im5.

Next, a method for selecting and setting the content of the story preview will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, when execution of a story preview is selected in the preview performance determination process (step S34-4) described later, the performance contents of the story preview are selected and set by the method shown below.
That is, first, based on the result of the special chart hit determination, the type of story preview (one of the types "one-stage story preview,""two-stage story preview," and "three-stage story preview") is selected.
Next, based on the type of story preview selected earlier, the "color" of the button icon B2 and the "light color" of the button lamp in the suggestion performance B are selected and set for each valid operation period (first valid operation period, second valid operation period). At this time, for each valid operation period (first valid operation period, second valid operation period), first, the "color" of the button icon B2 ("red" or "white") is selected based on the type of story preview selected earlier, and then the same "light color" as the "color" of the button icon B2 selected earlier is selected as the "light color" of the button lamp in the suggestion performance B. Then, the selected "color" is set as the "color" of the button icon B2 for each valid operation period (first valid operation period, second valid operation period), and the selected "light color" is set as the "light color" of the button lamp in the suggestion performance B.
The content of the story preview is set as described above.

(Hidden button announcement)
The "hidden button preview" is a type of main preview performance that suggests the result of the start judgment (specifically, the possibility that a "jackpot" will be judged by the special chart hit judgment) depending on the presentation mode. In particular, the dialogue preview and story preview are button previews that suggest to the player that the button preview is being executed (specifically, that the operation valid state is being set). On the other hand, the hidden button preview is a button preview that does not suggest to the player that the button preview is being executed (specifically, that the operation valid state is being set) (is difficult to see). In other words, the hidden button preview is a button preview that makes it difficult to see the presentation content (to confirm, recognize, and grasp the presentation content) compared to the dialogue preview and story preview.
The hidden button preview is a button preview using the effect button 5b. That is, in the hidden button preview, an effective operation state is set in response to the start of the hidden button preview. In addition, the effective operation state is released in response to the passage of a predetermined effective operation time from the setting of the effective operation state. The release of the effective operation state then ends the hidden button preview. In particular, in the hidden button preview, the lighting state of the preview lamp (not shown) changes in response to the pressing of the effect button 5b while the effective operation state is being set.
In the following description, in the case of hidden button preview, the period from when the valid operation state is set (the start of hidden button preview) to when the valid operation state is released (the end of hidden button preview) is referred to as the "valid operation period."

The hidden button announcement is executed during a specified "super reach variation presentation." In the hidden button announcement, unless the presentation button 5b is pressed, no presentation is executed that suggests that the hidden button announcement is being executed. In other words, in the hidden button announcement, no presentation is executed that suggests that the operation is valid. In particular, in the hidden button announcement, the button lamp is controlled (operated) to be in an off state during the operation valid period.
On the other hand, in the hidden button preview, during the operation valid period, each time the effect button 5b is pressed, a press effect is executed to indicate that the press operation of the effect button 5b has been detected (accepted). In this embodiment, as the press effect, a suggestion lamp (not shown) is lit for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 [s]).
As a result, by pressing the effect button 5b during the execution of the hidden button announcement, the player can recognize for the first time that pressing the effect button 5b is possible (the operation is valid during the period), and by extension, that the hidden button announcement is being executed. In other words, the player cannot recognize that the hidden button announcement is being executed unless he presses the effect button 5b.

In the hidden button notice, the light emission mode (lighting mode) of the notice lamp changes in stages according to the pressing operation of the effect button 5b during the operation effective period. The light emission mode of the notice lamp that is finally reached indicates the expectation of a big win.
In this embodiment, in the hidden button warning, the lighting state of the warning lamp changes in a maximum of four stages (in the order of first stage, second stage, third stage, and fourth stage) from the first stage (initial stage) to the fifth stage (final stage). At this time, the lighting state of the warning lamp changes (promotes) by one stage at a time.
In the first stage, the warning lamp is off (on state). Meanwhile, in the second stage, the warning lamp is on in "white" (on state). Meanwhile, in the third stage, the warning lamp is on in "green" (on state). Meanwhile, in the fourth stage, the warning lamp is on in "red" (on state).
As a result, in the hidden button preview, in the first stage, the preview lamp is off, and by progressing from the first stage to the second stage, the preview lamp changes from an off state to a lit "white" state, and further, by progressing from the second stage to the third stage, the preview lamp changes from a lit "white" state to a lit "green" state, and by progressing from the third stage to the fourth stage, the preview lamp changes from a lit "green" state to a lit "red" state.
Here, when the light emission state of the notice lamp reaches a stage higher than the second stage, the light emission state of the notice lamp continues until the end of the valid operation period. Then, in response to the end of the valid operation period, the notice lamp is controlled to be in an off state, and the hidden button notice ends.

In this embodiment, the types (modes) of hidden button notice are defined as "hidden button notice A,""hidden button notice B," and "hidden button notice C." The jackpot expectancies for each type of hidden button notice are defined as "hidden button notice C,""hidden button notice B," and "hidden button notice A," in order of decreasing jackpot expectancy (high jackpot expectancy → low jackpot expectancy).
In "Hidden Button Announcement A," by pressing the performance button 5b during the valid operation period, it is possible to change (promote) the lighting state of the announcement lamp, up to the second stage.
In "Hidden Button Notice B," by pressing the performance button 5b during the valid operation period, it is possible to change (promote) the lighting state of the notice lamp, up to the third stage.
In "Hidden Button Notice C," by pressing the performance button 5b during the valid operation period, it is possible to change (promote) the lighting state of the notice lamp, up to a maximum of the fourth stage.
In addition, as a type of hidden button prediction, a type may be specified in which the light emission mode of the prediction lamp is changed (promoted) from the first stage to a stage indicating a confirmed "jackpot" (for example, "rainbow color") in response to a single press of the effect button 5b during the valid operation period.

Next, a method for selecting and setting the performance content of the hidden button preview will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, when the execution of the hidden button announcement is selected in the announcement performance determination process (step S34-4) described later, the performance content of the hidden button announcement is selected and set by the method shown below.
That is, first, based on the result of the special chart hit judgment, the type of hidden button notice (any type among "hidden button notice A", "hidden button notice B" and "hidden button notice C") is selected. Then, the selected type is set as the type of hidden button notice.
The above is how the hidden button announcement effect is set.

(Sub preview performance)
Next, the sub-preview performance executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "sub preview performance" is a performance that is executed across multiple variable performances, and is a performance that suggests the results of the start judgment (special symbol hit judgment, special symbol pattern judgment, special symbol variable pattern judgment, etc.) related to each variable performance. In this embodiment, a button preview (specifically, a continuous button preview, etc.) is specified as a type of sub preview performance.

(Continuous button press notice)
Fig. 51 is a diagram showing an example of a battle image im6. Fig. 52 is a diagram showing a flow of consecutive button announcements.
The "continuous button announcement" is a type of sub-announcement effect that suggests the result of the start judgment (specifically, the possibility that a "jackpot" will be determined by the special symbol hit judgment) depending on its presentation mode. In particular, the continuous button announcement is executed across a predetermined number of consecutive variable presentations (variable display of special symbols).
That is, the continuous button announcement is executed over a predetermined number of predetermined announcements (variable display of special symbols) selected and set in advance at the longest. Specifically, the continuous button announcement is terminated when either of the following conditions is met: (1) the predetermined number of predetermined announcements (variable display of special symbols) selected and set in advance have been executed, or (2) a "jackpot" has been won.
In this embodiment, the predetermined number of warnings is set to "10 times,""15times,""20times," and "25 times." When the continuous button warning starts, one of "10 times,""15times,""20times," and "25 times" is selected and set as the predetermined number of warnings.
As a result, when "10 times" is selected and set as the predetermined number of predictions, the continuous button prediction is executed across a maximum of 10 change presentations (change presentations of special symbols). On the other hand, when "15 times" is selected and set as the predetermined number of predictions, the continuous button prediction is executed across a maximum of 15 change presentations (change presentations of special symbols). On the other hand, when "20 times" is selected and set as the predetermined number of predictions, the continuous button prediction is executed across a maximum of 20 change presentations (change presentations of special symbols). On the other hand, when "25 times" is selected and set as the predetermined number of predictions, the continuous button prediction is executed across a maximum of 25 change presentations (change presentations of special symbols).

The continuous button preview is a button preview using the performance button 5b. That is, in the continuous button preview, the operation valid state is set during the period from the start to the end. In this case, in the continuous button preview, the operation valid state is set only during the variable performance (during the variable display of the special pattern), and the operation valid state is not set (the operation valid state is released) during the stop performance (during the stop display of the special pattern).
As a result, as shown in Figure 52, the consecutive button announcement (display of battle image im6 described later) is executed continuously across a predetermined number of announcements of changing effects (display of changing special patterns), but the operation valid state is set intermittently.
For example, if "10 times" is selected/set as the predetermined number of notices, the continuous button notice (display of battle image im6) continues for the longest period from the start of the first variable performance (display of variable special symbols) to the end of the tenth variable performance (display of variable special symbols). Meanwhile, in this case, during the period from the start of the first variable performance (display of variable special symbols) to the end of the tenth variable performance (display of variable special symbols), the operation valid state is set during each variable performance (during the display of variable special symbols for each time), and the operation valid state is not set (the operation valid state is released) during each stop performance (during the display of stopped special symbols for each time).
In the following description, the period during which the operation valid state is set in the continuous button preview is referred to as the "operation valid period."

Specifically, during the consecutive button preview, the battle image im6 is constantly displayed on the display screen 31a during the period from the start to the end of the consecutive button preview.
As shown in FIG. 51, the "battle image im6" is an image in which a friendly character and an enemy character face off against each other.
In addition, in the continuous button preview, during the valid operation period, the button icon B3 is displayed on the display screen 31a, and a suggestive effect C (lamp effect) is executed by the button lamp. In the continuous button preview, the display of the button icon B3 and the execution of the suggestive effect C by the button lamp indicate to the player that the valid operation period is in progress (that the effect button 5b can be operated).
The "button icon B3" is an image (icon) that imitates the effect button 5b. The button icon B3 is an image (icon) that prompts the user to operate the effect button 5b. Here, in the continuous button preview, the "color" of the button icon B3 is set to "white."
The "indicative effect C" is an effect that indicates (notifies) that the effect button 5b can be pressed. In the indicative effect C, the button lamp is illuminated (lit) in the same "color" (specifically, "white") as the "color" of the button icon B3 displayed on the display screen 31a.
In the continuous button preview, each time the effect button 5b is pressed during the operation valid period, a display of "ally character attacks enemy character" is executed in the battle image im6. Then, when a successful effect is executed in response to the pressing of the effect button 5b, it is suggested that a "big win" has been won.
The "success performance" is a moving image showing "an enemy character being knocked out by an attack from an ally character."
In addition, the consecutive button announcement may be configured to be executed as a pseudo-variation effect.
In addition, in the continuous button notice, the predetermined notice number may be selected according to the reserved number (the reserved number of special figures 1 and 2). For example, the predetermined notice number may be selected to be the same number as the reserved number (the total of the reserved number of special figures 1 and 2, or the reserved number of special figures 1, or the reserved number of special figures 2).
In addition, in the continuous button notice according to this embodiment, the operation valid state is set only during the change performance (during the change display of the special pattern), and the operation valid state is not set (the operation valid state is released) during the stop performance (during the stop display of the special pattern). However, during the stop performance (during the stop display of the special pattern), the operation valid state may not be set (the operation valid state is released) only during a part of the period, and the operation valid state may be set during the other period except for the part of the period. For example, during the period from the start of the stop performance (stop display of the special pattern) until a predetermined time has elapsed, the operation valid state may not be set (the operation valid state is released), and during the period from the elapse of the predetermined time until the end of the stop performance (stop display of the special pattern), the operation valid state may be set. Also, the operation valid state may be set during the customer waiting state.
In addition, the consecutive button preview may be configured so that when a "successful performance" is executed, a specified bonus (a specified item, a specified icon/image, etc.) is awarded (obtained).

Next, a method for selecting and setting the content of the continuous button preview will be explained.
In the pachinko machine 1, when the execution of the consecutive button announcement is selected in the announcement performance determination process (step S34-4) described later, the performance content of the consecutive button announcement is selected and set by the method shown below.
That is, first, the predetermined number of predictions is selected and set. For this, one of "10 times", "15 times", "20 times" and "25 times" is selected as the predetermined number of predictions by lottery. Then, the selected predetermined number of predictions is set. This starts the continuous button prediction.
In addition, during execution of the continuous button announcement, when each change performance (changing display of special symbols) starts, the performance content (mode) of the continuous button announcement to be executed during the change performance is selected and set based on the result of the start judgment (specifically, the special symbol hit judgment) related to the change performance.
At this time, if the result of the start judgment (specifically, the special chart hit judgment) for the variable performance is a "jackpot", whether or not to enable the success performance is selected by lottery in the continuous button announcement executed during the variable performance. Also, if it is selected that the successful performance is enabled, the number of times the performance button 5b is pressed to enable the successful performance is selected by lottery. As a result, if it is selected that the successful performance is enabled, the successful performance is executed in response to the number of times the performance button 5b is pressed during the operation effective period set during the variable performance reaching the selected number of times. On the other hand, if it is selected that the successful performance is not enabled, the successful performance will not be executed even if the performance button 5b is pressed during the operation effective period set during the variable performance.
Furthermore, if the result of the start judgment (specifically, the special chart hit judgment) for the variable performance is a "miss," the successful performance will not be executed even if the performance button 5b is pressed during the operation valid period set during the variable performance.

(Combination of button previews)
Next, the combination of button previews will be explained.
Fig. 53 is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of button notice and notice priority, Fig. 54 is a diagram for explaining the transparency setting, and Fig. 55 is a diagram showing the operation of the button lamp.
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 executes multiple types of button previews (specifically, dialogue preview, story preview, hidden button preview, and continuous button preview). The multiple types of button previews can be combined. In particular, the operation effective periods of the multiple types of button previews can be combined.
"Complex" refers to overlapping (running in parallel) periods.
In this embodiment, the multiple types of button previews belonging to the main preview performance are configured not to be combined. That is, among the dialogue preview, story preview, and hidden button preview, two or more button previews are configured not to be combined. In other words, among the dialogue preview, story preview, and hidden button preview, the operation effective period of two or more button previews is configured not to be combined.
On the other hand, the button preview belonging to the main preview performance and the button preview belonging to the sub preview performance are configured to be combined. That is, any of the button previews of the dialogue preview, the story preview, and the hidden button preview and the continuous button preview are configured to be combined. In other words, the operation effective period of any of the button previews of the dialogue preview, the story preview, and the hidden button preview and the operation effective period of the continuous button preview are configured to be combined.
In particular, as described above, the continuous button preview is executed across a predetermined number of consecutive preview variable performances (variable display of special symbols). In other words, the effective operation period of the continuous button preview is longer than the effective operation period of the button preview (dialogue preview, story preview, or hidden button preview) belonging to the main preview performance. This makes it easier for a button preview (dialogue preview, story preview, or hidden button preview) belonging to the main preview performance to be executed while the continuous button preview is being executed.

Here, for both the continuous button preview and the button preview belonging to the main preview performance (dialogue preview, story preview or hidden button preview), the operation corresponding to the pressing of the performance button 5b is specified, and the operation of the button lamp during the effective operation period is also specified.
As a result, when the effective operation period of the continuous button preview and the effective operation period of the button preview belonging to the main preview performance are combined, it is necessary to determine which button preview, either the continuous button preview or the button preview belonging to the main preview performance, corresponds to the operation to be executed as the operation in response to the pressing of the performance button 5b during the combined effective operation period, and it is also necessary to determine which button preview, either the continuous button preview or the button preview belonging to the main preview performance, corresponds to the operation of the button lamp during the combined effective operation period.
Therefore, in this embodiment, a notice priority is defined for each type of button notice. When the operation effective periods of multiple types of button notices are combined, the operation corresponding to the pressing operation of the performance button 5b during the combined operation effective periods and the operation of the button lamp during the combined operation effective periods are selected and set based on the notice priority defined for the multiple types of button notices.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 53, the highest priority (specifically, "1") is set as the priority of the dialogue preview and story preview. Also, a lower priority (specifically, "2") is set as the priority of the continuous button preview. Also, a lower priority (specifically, "3") is set as the priority of the hidden button preview.
As a result, the preview priority of each type of button preview is defined as follows, from highest preview priority to lowest: "dialogue preview/story preview,""continuous button preview," and "hidden button preview" (high preview priority → low preview priority).
In other words, suggestive effect A, which corresponds to the dialogue preview, and suggestive effect B, which corresponds to the story preview, are effects that suggest a certain degree of expectation (promotion expectation or development expectation). In contrast, suggestive effect C, which corresponds to the continuous button preview, is not an effect that suggests a certain degree of expectation. Therefore, suggestive effects A and B are more likely to interest players than suggestive effect C.
In this case, if the prediction priority of the continuous button prediction is set to a higher rank than the prediction priority of the dialogue prediction and story prediction, when the effective operation period of the continuous button prediction is combined with the effective operation period of the dialogue prediction and story prediction, the button lamp will execute suggestive effect C during the combined effective operation period, and suggestive effects A and B, which are of greater interest to players than suggestive effect C, will not be executed.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the notice priority of the dialogue notice/story notice is set to a higher order than the notice priority of the continuous button notice. In other words, the notice priority of the dialogue notice/story notice, which has a shorter operation effective period than the continuous button notice, is set to a higher order than the notice priority of the continuous button notice, which has a longer operation effective period than the dialogue notice/story notice. This ensures that, when the operation effective period of the continuous button notice and the operation effective period of the dialogue notice/story notice are combined, the suggestion effects A and B, which are of greater interest to players than the suggestion effect C, are executed during the combined operation effective period.
Also, as described above, in the case of hidden button preview, the button lamp is controlled (operated) to an off state (non-suggestive state/state in which a non-suggestive performance is being executed) during the valid operation period.
In this case, if the prediction priority of the hidden button prediction is specified to be higher than the prediction priority of the consecutive button prediction, when the effective operation period of the hidden button prediction and the effective operation period of the consecutive button prediction are combined, the button lamp will be controlled to an off state (non-suggested state/state in which a non-suggested performance is being executed) during the combined effective operation periods, and the suggested performance C will not be executed.
As a result, even though the button icon B3 corresponding to the consecutive button announcement is displayed on the display screen 31a, the button lamp will be off, which may give the player a sense of discomfort, and based on this state, it may be possible to determine that a hidden button announcement is being made.
Therefore, in this embodiment, the notice priority of the consecutive button notice is set to a higher order than the notice priority of the hidden button notice. That is, the notice priority of the consecutive button notice, which makes it easier to visually check the performance content (check the performance content, recognize the performance content, and understand the performance content) compared to the hidden button notice, is set to a higher order than the notice priority of the hidden button notice, which makes it difficult to visually check the performance content (check the performance content, recognize the performance content, and understand the performance content) compared to the consecutive button notice. As a result, when the operation effective period of the hidden button notice and the operation effective period of the consecutive button notice are combined, the suggestive performance C is executed by the button lamp during the combined operation effective period, and it is possible to match the display of the button icon B3 on the display screen 31a with the operation of the button lamp. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which it is possible to determine that the hidden button notice is being executed based on the operation of the button lamp.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the operation effective periods of multiple types of button notices are combined, if the effect button 5b is pressed during the combined operation effective period, the effect of pressing the effect button 5b will, in principle, only affect the button notice with the higher notice priority among the multiple types of button notices. In other words, in response to the pressing of the effect button 5b during the combined operation effective period, for the button notice with the higher notice priority among the multiple types of button notices, an operation corresponding to the pressing of the effect button 5b specified in the performance scenario data is executed, and for the button notice with the lower notice priority, an operation corresponding to the pressing of the effect button 5b specified in the performance scenario data is not executed.
However, in this embodiment, it is possible to set the transparency setting to "enabled" or "disabled" for each type of button preview.
The "transparent setting" is a setting that specifies whether or not the effect of pressing the effect button 5b will have an effect on not only the button preview in question but also on the other button previews when the effective operation period of the button preview in question is combined with the effective operation period of another button preview that has a lower preview priority than the button preview in question and the effect button 5b is pressed during the combined effective operation period. In this embodiment, it is possible to set the transparency setting to "enabled" or "disabled" for each type of button preview.

As a result, as shown in Fig. 54(a), when the transparent setting is set to "enabled" for the first button preview, when the operation effective period of the first button preview and the operation effective period of the second button preview, which has a lower preview priority than the first button preview, are combined, if the performance button 5b is pressed during the combined operation effective period, the effect of the pressing operation of the performance button 5b will extend to both the first button preview and the second button preview. In other words, in response to the pressing operation of the performance button 5b during the combined operation effective period, an operation corresponding to the pressing operation of the performance button 5b specified in the performance scenario data corresponding to the first button preview is executed, and an operation corresponding to the pressing operation of the performance button 5b specified in the performance scenario data corresponding to the second button preview is executed (multiple effect mode).
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54(b), when the transparency setting is set to "disabled" for the first button preview, when the operation effective period of the first button preview and the operation effective period of the second button preview, which has a lower preview priority than the first button preview, are combined, if the performance button 5b is pressed during the combined operation effective period, the effect of the pressing operation of the performance button 5b will only apply to the first button preview, and will not apply to the second button preview. In other words, in response to the pressing operation of the performance button 5b during the combined operation effective period, an operation corresponding to the pressing operation of the performance button 5b specified in the performance scenario data corresponding to the first button preview is executed, but an operation corresponding to the pressing operation of the performance button 5b specified in the performance scenario data corresponding to the second button preview is not executed (single effect mode).

In this embodiment, the transparency setting is set to "enabled" for the dialogue preview, story preview, and continuous button preview, and the transparency setting is set to "disabled" for the hidden button preview.
In other words, among the multiple types of button previews, the button preview with the lowest preview priority (specifically, hidden button preview) has its transparency setting set to "disabled," and the button previews with preview priorities higher than the lowest (specifically, dialogue previews, story previews, and continuous button previews) have their transparency setting set to "enabled."
In addition, the transparency setting may be set to "enabled" for all button previews.
In addition, among the button previews (dialogue previews, story previews, and hidden button previews) that belong to the main preview performance, the transparency setting for some of the button previews may be set to "disabled," and the transparency setting for other button previews may be set to "enabled."
In addition, for each button preview (dialogue preview, story preview, hidden button preview, and continuous button preview), the transparency setting may be changed (switched) between "enabled" and "disabled" depending on the game status (special chart high probability state or special chart low probability state, state in which time-saving control is in progress or state in which time-saving control is stopped, etc.) and the mode (type) of the variable presentation being executed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when the operation effective periods of multiple types of button notices are combined, as the operation of the button lamp during the combined operation effective period, the operation corresponding to the button notice with the higher notice priority among the multiple types of button notices is executed, and the operation corresponding to the button notice with the lower notice priority is not executed. In other words, as the operation of the button lamp during the combined operation effective period, for the button notice with the higher notice priority among the multiple types of button notices, the operation of the button lamp specified in the performance scenario data is executed, and for the button notice with the lower notice priority, the operation of the button lamp specified in the performance scenario data is not executed.
As a result, as shown in Fig. 55, when the operation effective period of the first button notice, which has a higher notice priority than the second button notice, is set during the operation effective period of the second button notice, during the period when the operation effective period of the first button notice and the operation effective period of the second button notice are not combined, the operation corresponding to the second button notice is executed as the operation of the button lamp, and during the period when the operation effective period of the first button notice and the operation effective period of the second button notice are combined, the operation corresponding to the first button notice is executed as the operation of the button lamp. That is, during the period when the operation effective period of the first button notice and the operation effective period of the second button notice are not combined, the operation of the button lamp specified in the performance scenario data corresponding to the second button notice is executed as the operation of the button lamp, and during the period when the operation effective period of the first button notice and the operation effective period of the second button notice are combined, the operation of the button lamp specified in the performance scenario data corresponding to the first button notice is executed as the operation of the button lamp.
In addition, when switching from the button lamp operation defined in the performance scenario data corresponding to the first button notice to the button lamp operation defined in the performance scenario data corresponding to the second button notice, the button lamp may be configured to execute an operation for switching. In addition, when switching from the button lamp operation defined in the performance scenario data corresponding to the second button notice to the button lamp operation defined in the performance scenario data corresponding to the first button notice, the button lamp may be configured to execute an operation for switching.

The control ROM 302 stores performance scenario data corresponding to each type of button preview. That is, performance scenario data corresponding to a dialogue preview, performance scenario data corresponding to a story preview, performance scenario data corresponding to a hidden button preview, and performance scenario data corresponding to a continuous button preview are stored.
The performance scenario setting area includes areas (button preview layers) in which performance scenario data corresponding to button previews are set, including a button preview layer 1, a button preview layer 2, and a button preview layer 3. The priority of each button preview layer is specified to be "button preview layer 1,""button preview layer 2," and "button preview layer 3" (high priority → low priority), in order of decreasing priority.
The button preview layer 1 is a storage area corresponding to a preview priority of 1. In the button preview layer 1, performance scenario data corresponding to a button preview for which a preview priority of 1 is specified is set.
The button preview layer 2 is a storage area corresponding to a preview priority of "2." In the button preview layer 2, performance scenario data corresponding to a button preview for which a preview priority of "2" is specified is set.
The button preview layer 3 is a storage area corresponding to a preview priority of "3." In the button preview layer 3, performance scenario data corresponding to a button preview for which a preview priority of "3" is specified is set.
That is, as described above, the preview priority of the dialogue preview is set to “1.” As a result, when the dialogue preview is executed, the performance scenario data corresponding to the dialogue preview is set in the button preview layer 1.
On the other hand, the preview priority of the story preview is set to “1.” As a result, when a story preview is executed, the performance scenario data corresponding to the story preview is set to the button preview layer 1.
On the other hand, the notice priority of the continuous button notice is set to “2.” As a result, when the continuous button notice is executed, the performance scenario data corresponding to the continuous button notice is set to the button notice layer 2.
On the other hand, the preview priority of the hidden button preview is set to “3.” As a result, when the hidden button preview is executed, the performance scenario data corresponding to the hidden button preview is set to the button preview layer 3.

(Button press processing)
Here, the processing executed by the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 when a button is pressed will be described.
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the process when a button is pressed.
During the valid operation period, the CPU 310 executes the button press processing shown in FIG. 56 each time a press operation of the effect button 5b is detected.
When the button press process is started, the process first proceeds to step S41-1.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether or not performance scenario data is set in button preview layer 1. If it is determined that performance scenario data is set (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-2. If it is determined that performance scenario data is not set (No), the process proceeds to step S41-4.
In step S41-2, a pressing operation setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-3. In the pressing operation setting process, the execution of an operation corresponding to the pressing operation of the performance button 5b is set according to the performance scenario data set in the button preview layer 1. As a result, the operation corresponding to the pressing operation of the performance button 5b specified in the performance scenario data set in the button preview layer 1 is executed.
In step S41-3, it is determined whether the transparency setting is set to "enabled" for the performance scenario data (button preview) set in button preview layer 1, and if it is determined that the transparency setting is set to "enabled" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-4, and if it is determined that the transparency setting is not set to "enabled" (the transparency setting is set to "disabled") (No), the processing when the button is pressed is terminated.

In step S41-4, it is determined whether or not performance scenario data is set in the button preview layer 2, and if it is determined that performance scenario data is set (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-5, and if it is determined that performance scenario data is not set (No), the process proceeds to step S41-7.
In step S41-5, a pressing operation setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-6. In the pressing operation setting process, the execution of an operation corresponding to the pressing operation of the performance button 5b is set according to the performance scenario data set in the button notice layer 2. As a result, the operation corresponding to the pressing operation of the performance button 5b specified in the performance scenario data set in the button notice layer 2 is executed.
In step S41-6, it is determined whether the transparency setting is set to "enabled" for the performance scenario data (button preview) set in button preview layer 2, and if it is determined that the transparency setting is set to "enabled" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-7, and if it is determined that the transparency setting is not set to "enabled" (the transparency setting is set to "disabled") (No), the processing when the button is pressed is terminated.

In step S41-7, it is determined whether or not performance scenario data is set in the button preview layer 3. If it is determined that performance scenario data is set (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-8. If it is determined that performance scenario data is not set (No), the processing when the button is pressed is terminated.
In step S41-8, a pressing operation setting process is executed, and the button pressing process is terminated. In the pressing operation setting process, an operation corresponding to the pressing operation of the performance button 5b is set according to the performance scenario data set in the button preview layer 3. As a result, an operation corresponding to the pressing operation of the performance button 5b specified in the performance scenario data set in the button preview layer 3 is executed.

(Button lamp setting process)
Next, the button lamp setting process executed by the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the button lamp setting process.
The CPU 310 executes the button lamp setting process shown in FIG. 57 for each type of button preview each time the valid operation period is set (started) and each time the valid operation period is released (ended).
When the button lamp setting process is started, the process first proceeds to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, it is determined whether or not performance scenario data is set in button preview layer 1, and if it is determined that performance scenario data is set (Yes), the process proceeds to step S42-2, and if it is determined that performance scenario data is not set (No), the process proceeds to step S42-3.
In step S42-2, a button lamp operation setting process is executed, and the button lamp setting process is terminated. In the button lamp operation setting process, the execution of the button lamp operation is set according to the performance scenario data set in the button notice layer 1. This starts the button lamp operation specified in the performance scenario data set in the button notice layer 1.

In step S42-3, it is determined whether or not performance scenario data is set in button preview layer 2, and if it is determined that performance scenario data is set (Yes), the process proceeds to step S42-4, and if it is determined that performance scenario data is not set (No), the process proceeds to step S42-5.
In step S42-4, a button lamp operation setting process is executed, and the button lamp setting process is terminated. In the button lamp operation setting process, the execution of the button lamp operation is set according to the performance scenario data set in the button notice layer 2. This starts the button lamp operation specified in the performance scenario data set in the button notice layer 2.

In step S42-5, it is determined whether or not performance scenario data is set in the button preview layer 3. If it is determined that performance scenario data is set (Yes), the process proceeds to step S42-6. If it is determined that performance scenario data is not set (No), the button lamp setting process is terminated.
In step S42-6, a button lamp operation setting process is executed, and the button lamp setting process is terminated. In the button lamp operation setting process, the execution of the button lamp operation is set according to the performance scenario data set in the button notice layer 3. This starts the button lamp operation specified in the performance scenario data set in the button notice layer 3.

(Example of a combination of multiple button announcements)
Next, an example of combining multiple types of button previews will be described.
First, a combination example of multiple types of button previews in the first example will be described.
Fig. 58 is a diagram showing a flow of effects when a continuous button preview and a line preview are combined. Fig. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a display effect when a continuous button preview and a line preview are combined.
The first example is an example of a case where the continuous button preview and the dialogue preview are combined. In particular, in the first example, the operation effective period of the dialogue preview is set during the operation effective period of the continuous button preview.
58, in the first example, during the effective operation period of the consecutive button preview, the button icon B3 is displayed on the display screen 31a, and the battle image im6 is displayed. Also, during the effective operation period of the line preview, the button icon B1 is displayed on the display screen 31a, and the first line preview image im1 is displayed.
As a result, as shown in Figure 59, during the period when the effective operation period of the consecutive button preview and the effective operation period of the line preview are combined, two button icons B1, B3 are displayed on the display screen 31a, and a battle image im6 and a first line preview image im1 are displayed.
In particular, in this embodiment, the dialogue preview has a higher preview priority than the continuous button preview. As a result, during the period of the effective operation period of the continuous button preview before the effective operation period of the dialogue preview is set, the button lamp executes a suggestive performance C corresponding to the continuous button preview. Then, in response to the setting (start) of the effective operation period of the dialogue preview, the button lamp starts a suggestive performance A corresponding to the dialogue preview, instead of the suggestive performance C corresponding to the continuous button preview. Also, in response to the release (end) of the effective operation period of the dialogue preview, the button lamp starts a suggestive performance C corresponding to the continuous button preview, instead of the suggestive performance A corresponding to the dialogue preview.
That is, during the effective operation period of the continuous button preview, when the effective operation period of the dialogue preview is not combined, the button lamp executes a suggestive performance C corresponding to the continuous button preview, and during the effective operation period of the dialogue preview is combined, the button lamp executes a suggestive performance A corresponding to the dialogue preview.
In addition, in this embodiment, the transparency setting for the line preview is set to "enabled." As a result, when a press operation of the effect button 5b is detected during a period in which the operation effective period of the consecutive button preview and the operation effective period of the line preview are combined, an operation corresponding to the line preview (specifically, display of the second line preview image im2) is started on the display screen 31a in response to this, and an operation corresponding to the consecutive button preview (specifically, display of an ally character attacking an enemy character in the battle image im6) is executed.
In the first example, in response to the release (end) of the effective operation period of the dialogue preview, even when the dialogue preview is being executed (while the second dialogue preview image im2 is being displayed), the button lamp starts a suggestive performance C corresponding to the continuous button preview instead of the suggestive performance A corresponding to the dialogue preview. However, it may be configured to wait for the start of the suggestive performance C until the dialogue preview ends. In other words, it may be configured to start a suggestive performance C corresponding to the continuous button preview instead of the suggestive performance A corresponding to the dialogue preview, in response to the end of the dialogue preview. In such a configuration, the timing of switching from the suggestive performance A to the suggestive performance C can be configured to differ depending on the content of the transparency setting of the dialogue preview. In other words, when the dialogue preview transparency setting is "enabled," the button lamp will start suggestive performance C corresponding to continuous button preview in place of suggestive performance A corresponding to the dialogue preview when the dialogue preview ends, and when the dialogue preview transparency setting is "disabled," the button lamp will start suggestive performance C corresponding to continuous button preview in place of suggestive performance A corresponding to the dialogue preview when the effective operation period of the dialogue preview is released (ended).

Next, a combination example of multiple types of button previews in the second example will be described.
Figure 60 shows the flow of presentation when consecutive button announcements and hidden button announcements are combined.
The second example is an example of a case where the consecutive button advance notice and the hidden button advance notice are combined. In particular, in the second example, the operation valid period of the hidden button advance notice is set during the operation valid period of the consecutive button advance notice.
As shown in FIG. 60, in the second example, during the effective operation period of the consecutive button preview, a button icon B3 is displayed on the display screen 31a, and a battle image im6 is also displayed.
In particular, in this embodiment, the consecutive button preview has a higher preview priority than the hidden button preview. As a result, during the effective operation period of the consecutive button preview, the button lamp always executes the suggestive performance C corresponding to the consecutive button preview. In other words, during the effective operation period of the consecutive button preview, the button lamp executes the suggestive performance C corresponding to the consecutive button preview throughout the period when the effective operation period of the hidden button preview is not combined and the period when the effective operation period of the hidden button preview is combined.
In this embodiment, the transparency setting for the consecutive button preview is set to "enabled." As a result, when a press operation of the effect button 5b is detected during a period in which the operation effective period of the consecutive button preview and the operation effective period of the hidden button preview are combined, an action corresponding to the consecutive button preview (specifically, a display of an ally character attacking an enemy character in the battle image im6) is executed on the display screen 31a in response to this, and an action corresponding to the hidden button preview (specifically, a press effect (an action in which a suggestion lamp is lit for a predetermined period of time)) is executed.

(Processing executed on the performance control board 300)
Next, the processing executed by the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 will be described.
In this embodiment, the command reception interrupt process, the sub timer interrupt process, and the movable body interrupt process described later are interrupt processes executed by an interrupt handler, while the Vsync interrupt process, the sound interrupt process, and the lamp interrupt process described later are interrupt processes (tasks) that can be executed in parallel at the same time by multitasking.
Here, the Vsync interrupt process, the sound interrupt process, and the lamp interrupt process may also be configured as interrupt processes executed by an interrupt handler.

(Sub-CPU initialization process)
First, the sub-CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the sub-CPU initialization process.
A reset circuit (not shown) is provided on the performance control board 300. When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the reset circuit generates a reset signal.
The CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 starts the sub-CPU initialization process shown in FIG. 38 in response to the generation of a reset signal by the reset circuit.
When the sub-CPU initialization process is started, the process first proceeds to step S28-1.
In step S28-1, an initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-2. In the initial setting process, various initial settings required to start performance control are executed.
Specifically, in the initialization process, various registers, timers, and the like used by the CPU 310 are initialized to initialize the CPU 310 .
In addition, the initialization process initializes various internal devices (CPU work memory 311, CPU interface 312, host interface 313, CG bus interface 314, DRAM interface 315, VRAM 316, serial communication controller 317, transfer circuit 318, preloader circuit 319, display circuit 320, graphics decoder circuit 321, drawing circuit 322, sound controller 323, etc.).
In addition, in the initialization process, various external devices (control ROM 302, CGROM 303, DRAM 304, etc.) are initialized. At this time, a value (in this embodiment, "0") designating a state in which the initial transfer described later is not completed is set in the initial transfer completion flag area of the DRAM 304.

In step S28-2, an initial transfer data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-3. In the initial transfer data setting process, information specifying data to be the subject of initial transfer is set.
Specifically, in the initial transfer data setting process, the initial transfer data list is set in a predetermined area of the DRAM 304, and a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the data transfer counter.
The "initial transfer data list" is a list of data to be transferred (preloaded) from CGROM 303 to the preload area of DRAM 304 when power is turned on. In this embodiment, the initial transfer data list specifies all compressed audio data among the data stored in CGROM 303 as data to be transferred.
Specifically, the initial transfer data list registers, for all compressed audio data stored in CGROM 303, the correspondence between information specifying the address of the memory area (memory area of CGROM 303) from which each compressed audio data is read (hereinafter referred to as the "read address"), information specifying the address of the memory area (memory area of DRAM 304) to which the compressed audio data is written (hereinafter referred to as the "write address"), and information specifying the order in which the compressed audio data is to be transferred (specifically, the value of the data transfer counter).

In step S28-3, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-4. In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released, and various interrupt processes become possible (permitted) to be executed.
In step S28-4, a random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-5. In the random number update process, various random numbers for effects are updated.
In step S28-5, an initial transfer process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-4, which will be described later.

(Initial transfer process)
Next, the initial transfer process of step S28-5 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the initial transfer process.
When the initial transfer process is executed in step S28-5, the process proceeds to step S44-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S44-1, it is determined whether the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1", and if it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is not "1" (is "0") (No), the process proceeds to step S44-2, and if it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1" (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-4).

In step S44-2, a SATA transfer process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-3. In the SATA transfer process, the data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred (preloaded) to the preload area of the DRAM 304 in accordance with the initial transfer data list set in step S28-1.
Specifically, in the SATA transfer process, first, the value of the data transfer counter is confirmed. Next, the initial transfer data list is referenced to obtain the read address and write address corresponding to the confirmed value of the data transfer counter. Then, data (compressed audio data) stored in the memory area specified by the obtained read data address is read, and the read data (compressed image data) is stored in the memory area specified by the obtained write address.
In the SATA transfer process, next, the data transfer counter value is incremented by "1".

In step S44-3, it is determined whether the initial transfer has been completed. If it is determined that the initial transfer has been completed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S44-4. If it is determined that the initial transfer has not been completed (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-4).
Here, in step S44-3, it is determined whether or not the transfer of all data registered in the initial transfer data list has been completed based on the value of the data transfer counter. If it is determined that the transfer of all data registered in the initial transfer data list has been completed, it is determined that the initial transfer has been completed, and if it is determined that the transfer of all data registered in the initial transfer data list has not been completed, it is determined that the initial transfer has not been completed.
In step S44-4, an initial transfer completion flag setting process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-3). In the initial transfer completion flag setting process, a value (in this embodiment, "1") designating a state in which the initial transfer is complete is set in the initial transfer completion flag area.

As a result, during the period from the execution of the initial setting process to the completion of the transfer (initial transfer) of all data registered in the initial transfer data list (all compressed audio data stored in CGROM 303), "0" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area. During the period in which "0" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area, the SATA transfer process of step S44-2 is repeatedly executed.
Thereafter, when the transfer (initial transfer) of all data registered in the initial transfer data list (all compressed audio data stored in CGROM 303) is completed, "1" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area.
In particular, in this embodiment, in response to "1" being set in the initial transfer completion flag area, a state is created in which it is possible to control the output of audio by the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound controller 323) and to control the display of performance images by the various image display devices 31, 32 (drawing processing by the VDP).
In other words, when "0" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area, it becomes impossible to control the output of audio from the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound controller 323) and to control the display of performance images by the various image display devices 31, 32 (drawing processing by the VDP).
On the other hand, when "1" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area, it becomes possible to control the output of audio from the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound controller 323) and to control the display of performance images by the various image display devices 31, 32 (drawing processing by the VDP).
On the other hand, in this embodiment, before the transfer of all data registered in the initial transfer data list (all compressed audio data stored in CGROM 303) is completed (before "1" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area), a state occurs in which it is possible to control the drive (light emission) of the various lamps 20, 21 (lamp drive processing by lamp controller 317a) and the drive control of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies) (motor drive processing by motor controller 317b).
In other words, after the initial setting process is executed, various interrupt processes are permitted to be executed, and thus a state is created in which it is possible to control the drive (light emission) of the various lamps 20, 21 (lamp drive process by lamp controller 317a) and the drive of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies) (motor drive process by motor controller 317b).

(Command reception interrupt processing)
Next, the command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 executes a command reception interrupt process (not shown) in response to receiving a control command from the main control board 200.
In the command reception interrupt processing, the control command received from the main control board 200 is stored in the reception buffer area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300.

(Sub timer interrupt processing)
Next, the sub timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the sub timer interrupt process.
The performance control board 300 includes a clock generating circuit. The clock generating circuit generates a clock pulse signal at predetermined intervals.
The CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 starts the sub timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 40 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of a clock pulse by the clock generating circuit. When the sub timer interrupt process starts, the process first proceeds to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-2. In the register save process, the register values are saved to a save area in the DRAM 304.

In step S31-2, a timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-3. In the timer update process, the values of various timers (such as performance scenario timers) equipped in the performance control board 300 are updated. Specifically, a predetermined value (a value corresponding to a predetermined period) is added or subtracted from the values of the various timers.
In step S31-3, a command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, the control command stored in the reception buffer of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300 is analyzed, and a process according to the received control command is executed. The command analysis process will be described later.

In step S31-4, a time schedule management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-5. In the time schedule management process, the progress of the presentation is managed based on the presentation scenario data set in the presentation scenario setting area and the value of the presentation scenario timer corresponding to the presentation scenario data.
Specifically, in the time schedule management process, for each rendering scenario data set in the rendering scenario setting area, it is determined whether or not there is process data whose start time has arrived. If it is determined that there is process data whose start time has arrived, each command information (message) included in the process data is stored (stored) in the corresponding buffer area.
At this time, command information regarding the display performance (such as a performance start command specifying the start of the display performance, a performance end command specifying the end of the display performance, etc.) is stored in a display command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information regarding sound performance (such as a performance start command that specifies the start of a sound performance) is stored in a sound command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information regarding the lamp performance (such as a performance start command that specifies the start of a lamp performance) is stored in a lamp command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information regarding the movable body performance (such as a performance start command that specifies the start of the movable body performance) is stored in a movable body command buffer area.

In step S31-5, the register restoration process is executed, and the sub timer interrupt process is terminated. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S31-1 are restored.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the command analysis process in step S31-3 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, the process proceeds to step S32-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S32-1, a setting value command receiving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2.
In the setting value command reception process, it is determined whether or not a setting value designation command has been received. If it is determined that a setting value designation command has been received, a value corresponding to the setting value designated by the setting value designation command is stored (set) in the setting value storage area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300.

In step S32-2, a game status command receiving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3.
In the game state command reception process, it is determined whether or not a game state designation command has been received. If it is determined that a game state designation command has been received, various effect flags are set.
In step S32-3, a hold command receiving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4, which will be described later.
In step S32-4, a read-ahead command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-5, which will be described later.
In step S32-5, a variable command receiving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6, which will be described later.
In step S32-6, a stop command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-7, which will be described later.
In step S32-7, an opening command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-8, which will be described later.

In step S32-8, a game play status command receiving process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4).
In the game status command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a game status designation command has been received. If it is determined that the game status designation command has been received, a game status setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game status designation command has not been received, the game status setting process is not executed and the process proceeds to the next step (step S31-4).
In the game status setting process, the game status designation command is analyzed.
Then, when the occurrence of the ready-to-fire state is specified by the game status specification command, a value (for example, "1") specifying that the ready-to-fire state is occurring is set in the game status flag area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300. Also, a performance is started that suggests (notifies) that the ready-to-fire state is occurring.
On the other hand, when the release of the ready-to-fire state is specified by the game status specification command, a value (for example, "0") specifying that the ready-to-fire state is being released is set in the game status flag area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300. Also, the performance suggesting (notifying) that the ready-to-fire state is occurring is terminated.

(Pending command reception process)
Next, the pending command receiving process in step S32-3 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the pending command receiving process.
When the hold command receiving process is executed in step S32-3, the process proceeds to step S36-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not a hold number designation command has been received. If it is determined that a hold number designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2. If it is determined that a hold number designation command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In step S36-2, it is determined whether the pending number specification command specifies an increase in the pending number (the pending number has increased by "1"), and if it is determined that the pending number specification command specifies an increase in the pending number (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-3, and if it is determined that the pending number specification command does not specify an increase in the pending number (specifies that the pending number has decreased by "1") (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, the reserved number addition process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the reserved number addition process, first, it is determined whether the reserved number designation command designates an increase in the reserved number of special chart 1.
Then, when it is determined that the reserved number designation command designates an increase in the reserved number of special chart 1, the value set in the reserved number counter of special chart 1 is added with "1" and set as a new reserved number counter of special chart 1. Also, a normal reserved performance corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special chart 1 game information is started.
At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved pattern h, among the four display positions included in the reserved pattern display area b2, a display position corresponding to the memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special pattern 1 game information is stored is set. Here, the memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special pattern 1 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the reserved number counter for special pattern 1.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the reserved number designation command specifies an increase in the reserved number of special chart 2, the value set in the reserved number counter of special chart 2 plus "1" is set in the reserved number counter of special chart 2. In addition, a normal reserved performance corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special chart 2 game information is started.
At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved pattern h, among the four display positions included in the reserved pattern display area b3, a display position corresponding to the memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special pattern 2 game information is stored is set. Here, the memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special pattern 2 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the special pattern 2 reserved number counter.

In step S36-4, a pending number subtraction process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the reserved number subtraction process, first, it is determined whether the reserved number specification command specifies subtraction of the reserved number of special chart 1.
Then, when it is determined that the reserved number designation command designates the subtraction of the reserved number of special chart 1, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the reserved number counter of special chart 1 is newly set in the reserved number counter of special chart 1. Also, the display position of each reserved pattern h displayed in the reserved pattern display area b2 is shifted (moved).
Specifically, the reserved effect corresponding to the reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1 is ended. This ends the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the ended reserved effect.
In addition, when a reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position in the reserved pattern display area b2 corresponding to memory area 1, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the reserved pattern display area b2 (the display position corresponding to memory area 1) to the reserved pattern display area b1.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 2 in the reserved pattern display area b2, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 2 to the display position corresponding to memory area 1.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 3 in the reserved pattern display area b2, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 3 to the display position corresponding to memory area 2.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 4 in the reserved pattern display area b2, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 4 to the display position corresponding to memory area 3.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved number designation command designates the subtraction of the reserved number of special figures 2, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the reserved number counter of special figures 2 is newly set in the reserved number counter of special figures 2. Also, the display position of each reserved pattern h displayed in the reserved pattern display area b3 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the reserved effect corresponding to the reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1 is ended. This ends the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the ended reserved effect.
In addition, when a reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position in the reserved pattern display area b3 corresponding to memory area 1, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the reserved pattern display area b3 (the display position corresponding to memory area 1) to the reserved pattern display area b1.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 2 in the reserved pattern display area b3, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 2 to the display position corresponding to memory area 1.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 3 in the reserved pattern display area b3, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 3 to the display position corresponding to memory area 2.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 4 in the reserved pattern display area b3, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 4 to the display position corresponding to memory area 3.

(Read-ahead command reception processing)
Next, the read-ahead command reception process in step S32-4 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the read-ahead command reception process.
When the read-ahead command reception process is executed in step S32-4, the process proceeds to step S33-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not a read-ahead designation command (first read-ahead designation command, second read-ahead designation command, and third read-ahead designation command) has been received, and if it is determined that a read-ahead designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-2, and if it is determined that a read-ahead designation command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, a look-ahead information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the look-ahead information analysis process, the information designated by the look-ahead designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300 as reserved information.
A reserved information storage area capable of storing reserved information is set in the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300. In addition, as the reserved information storage area, a first reserved information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 game information storage area of the RAM 230) and a second reserved information storage area corresponding to the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 game information storage area of the RAM 230) are set.
The first reserved information storage area includes storage areas 1 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing reserved information. The first reserved information storage area stores reserved information corresponding to the special chart 1 game information stored in the special chart 1 game information storage area. That is, the reserved information stored in storage area 1 of the first reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 1 game information stored in storage area 1 of the special chart 1 game information storage area. The reserved information stored in storage area 2 of the first reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 1 game information stored in storage area 2 of the special chart 1 game information storage area. The reserved information stored in storage area 3 of the first reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 1 game information stored in storage area 3 of the special chart 1 game information storage area. The reserved information stored in storage area 4 of the first reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 1 game information stored in storage area 4 of the special chart 1 game information storage area.
The second reserved information storage area includes storage areas 1 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing reserved information. The second reserved information storage area stores reserved information corresponding to the special chart 2 game information stored in the special chart 2 game information storage area. That is, the reserved information stored in storage area 1 of the second reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 2 game information stored in storage area 1 of the special chart 2 game information storage area. The reserved information stored in storage area 2 of the second reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 2 game information stored in storage area 2 of the special chart 2 game information storage area. The reserved information stored in storage area 3 of the second reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 2 game information stored in storage area 3 of the special chart 2 game information storage area. The reserved information stored in storage area 4 of the second reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 2 game information stored in storage area 4 of the special chart 2 game information storage area.
Each pending information includes pattern information indicating the type of stopping pattern, first variation information indicating the content of the variation mode ("variation mode number" or "indefinite value"), and second variation information indicating the content of the variation pattern ("variation pattern number" or "indefinite value").

In the look-ahead information analysis process, first, it is determined whether or not the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
Then, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of the stop symbol designated by the first look-ahead designation command ("miss symbol" or "jackpot p symbol"), the content of the fluctuation mode designated by the second look-ahead designation command ("fluctuation mode m" or "indefinite value"), and the content of the fluctuation pattern designated by the third look-ahead designation command ("fluctuation pattern n" or "indefinite value") are analyzed, and reserved information is generated that includes symbol information corresponding to the analyzed type of the stop symbol, first fluctuation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed fluctuation mode, and second fluctuation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed fluctuation pattern.The generated reserved information is then stored (saved) in the first reserved information storage area.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of the stop symbol designated by the first look-ahead designation command ("miss symbol" or "jackpot p symbol"), the content of the fluctuation mode designated by the second look-ahead designation command ("fluctuation mode m" or "indefinite value"), and the content of the fluctuation pattern designated by the third look-ahead designation command ("fluctuation pattern n" or "indefinite value") are analyzed, and reserved information is generated that includes symbol information corresponding to the analyzed type of the stop symbol, first fluctuation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed fluctuation mode, and second fluctuation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed fluctuation pattern.Then, the generated reserved information is stored (saved) in the second reserved information storage area.
In the following description, the pending information stored in the pending information storage area in step S33-2 is referred to as “pre-read pending information.” In addition, among the pending information stored in the first pending information storage area, the pending information for which notification display (variable display and stationary display) is executed before the pending information to be pre-read is referred to as “advancing pending information.”

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not a pre-reading preview performance is being executed, and if it is determined that a pre-reading preview performance is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-4, and if it is determined that a pre-reading preview performance is being executed (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, while the pre-reading preview performance is being executed, "1" is set in the pre-reading preview performance in-progress flag area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300. Therefore, in step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading preview performance is being executed based on whether or not "1" is set in the pre-reading preview performance in-progress flag area.
In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the pre-reading preview performance are met, and if it is determined that the conditions for executing the pre-reading preview performance are met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5, and if it is determined that the conditions for executing the pre-reading preview performance are not met (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, it is determined that the conditions for executing the pre-reading preview performance are met when all of the following conditions are met: (1) the pending information to be pre-read is pending information corresponding to special chart 1 game information; (2) a predetermined number (in this embodiment, "2") or more of advance pending information is stored; (3) there is no advance pending information indicating a type (fluctuation pattern number) belonging to "normal reach fluctuation" or "super reach fluctuation" as a type of fluctuation pattern; (4) time-saving control is stopped; and (5) a jackpot game state is not occurring.
The contents of the pre-reading preview performance execution conditions can be changed as appropriate. That is, it may be configured such that it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance execution conditions are satisfied when one or more of the above conditions (1) to (5) are satisfied, rather than when all of the above conditions (1) to (5) are satisfied. In addition, the pre-reading preview performance execution conditions may include other conditions different from the above conditions (1) to (5).

In step S33-5, a pre-reading advance notice performance lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-6. In the pre-reading advance notice performance lottery process, a pre-reading advance notice performance lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice performance.
A control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a pre-reading advance notice performance lottery table in which winning values of the pre-reading advance notice performance lottery are registered.
In the pre-reading notice performance lottery process, first, the reserved notice appearance designation information stored in the reserved notice appearance designation information setting area is confirmed. Then, if non-appearance designation information is set in the reserved notice appearance designation information setting area, the pre-reading notice performance lottery is not executed (it is decided not to execute the pre-reading notice performance). On the other hand, if appearance designation information is set in the reserved notice appearance designation information setting area, the pre-reading notice performance lottery is executed.
In the pre-reading advance notice performance lottery, first, a pre-reading advance notice performance lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Then, based on the obtained pre-reading advance notice performance lottery random number and a pre-reading advance notice performance lottery table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice performance.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the player has won the pre-reading preview performance lottery executed in step S33-5. If it is determined that the player has won the pre-reading preview performance lottery (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-7. If it is determined that the player has lost the pre-reading preview performance lottery (No), the process proceeds to step S33-8.

In step S33-7, a pre-reading advance notice effect setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-8. In the pre-reading advance notice effect setting process, the contents of the pre-reading advance notice effect (hold advance notice effect) are set.
Specifically, in the pre-reading preview performance setting process, first, a reserved final mode selection process is executed. In the reserved final mode selection process, a reserved final mode is selected and set.
"Final reserved state" refers to the state of the reserved pattern hy that is the subject of the notice and that ultimately changes during the reserved notice performance.
The control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a reserve final color lottery table in which the correspondence between the reserve final mode lottery random numbers and the reserve final modes is registered.
In addition, a reservation final mode lottery table corresponding to each type of fluctuation pattern is stored as a reservation final mode lottery table.
In the reserved final mode selection process, first, a reserved final mode selection random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the type of the variation pattern indicated by the reserved information to be read ahead is confirmed, and the reserved final mode selection table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the acquired reserved final mode selection random number and the read reserved final mode selection table, the reserved final mode is selected (determined).

In the pre-reading advance notice performance setting process, next, a reserved change trigger selection process is executed. In the reserved change trigger selection process, a reserved change trigger is selected and set.
A control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a reserve change trigger lottery table in which the correspondence between reserve change trigger lottery random numbers and reserve change patterns is registered.
"Pending change pattern" is information (scenario data) that specifies a combination of pending change triggers.
In addition, a reserve change trigger lottery table corresponding to each combination of the special chart 1 reserve number ("2" to "4") and the reserve final state is stored as a reserve change trigger lottery table.
In the reservation change opportunity selection process, first, a reservation change opportunity lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the reservation number of the special chart 1 and the reservation final mode selected in the reservation final mode selection process are confirmed, and the reservation change opportunity lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the reservation change opportunity lottery random number obtained and the reservation change opportunity lottery table read, a reservation notice performance number is determined (determined). Then, the performance scenario data corresponding to the determined reservation notice performance number is read, and the read performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer corresponding to the performance scenario data are set in the performance scenario area.

In the pre-reading advance notice performance setting process, next, a reserved change content selection process is executed. In the reserved change content selection process, reserved change content corresponding to each reserved change trigger is selected and set.
Specifically, in the reserved change content selection process, the state of the reserved pattern hy before the change and the state of the reserved pattern hy after the change are set as the reserved change content corresponding to each reserved change trigger.
In this embodiment, of the one or more hold change triggers set in the hold change trigger selection process, the hold change content corresponding to each hold change trigger is selected in order from the hold change trigger that arrives (occurs) later (later hold change trigger).
For example, if three hold change triggers are set in the hold change trigger selection process, the hold change contents corresponding to each hold change trigger are selected in the following order: the third (final) hold change trigger, the second hold change trigger, and the first hold change trigger.
In addition, when selecting the reserved change contents corresponding to each reserved change trigger, first, the state of the reserved pattern hy after the change is selected, and then the state of the reserved pattern hy before the change is selected. At this time, as the state of the reserved pattern hy before the change, a state with a lower expectation is determined compared to the state of the reserved pattern hy after the change. As a result, in response to the arrival of each reserved change trigger, the state of the reserved pattern hy with the predicted target is changed (promoted) to a state with a higher expectation.
A control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a reserved change content selection table in which the correspondence between the reserved change content selection random number and the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified before the change is registered.
In addition, a reserved change content selection table corresponding to each state of the reserved pattern h (the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change) is stored as a reserved change content selection table.
In the reserved change content lottery table corresponding to each state of the reserved pattern h (the state of the predicted reserved pattern hy after the change), only states of the predicted reserved pattern hy before the change that have a lower expectation level compared to the state of the predicted reserved pattern hy after the change are registered.
In the reserved change content selection process, first, the reserved change content is selected for the last reserved change trigger among the reserved change triggers set in the reserved change trigger selection process. For this, first, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change related to the reserved change trigger of the last time is selected. At this time, the reserved final state selected in the reserved final state selection process is selected as the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change related to the reserved change trigger of the last time. Next, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified before the change related to the reserved change trigger of the last time is selected. For this, first, a reserved change content lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, a reserved change content lottery table corresponding to the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change selected for the reserved change trigger of the last time is read. Then, based on the reserved change content lottery random number obtained and the reserved change content lottery table read, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified before the change related to the reserved change trigger of the last time is selected.
In the reservation change content selection process, next, the reservation change content is selected for each reservation change trigger, excluding the last reservation change trigger, from among the reservation change triggers set in the reservation change trigger selection process. At this time, the reservation change content corresponding to each reservation change trigger is determined in order from the reservation change trigger that arrives last.
To determine the reserved change contents corresponding to each reserved change trigger, first, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change related to the reserved change trigger is determined. At this time, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified before the change already selected for the next reserved change trigger is selected as the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change related to the current reserved change trigger. Next, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified before the change related to the current reserved change trigger is determined. For this, first, a reserved change content lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, a reserved change content lottery table corresponding to the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change selected for the current reserved change trigger is read. Then, based on the obtained reserved change content lottery random number and the read reserved change content lottery table, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified before the change related to the current reserved change trigger is selected.
In the reserved change content selection process, the reserved change content selected for each reserved change opportunity is then set in the area corresponding to the reserved change opportunity in the performance scenario setting area. As a result, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified changes (promotion) according to the reserved change content set for the reserved change opportunity in response to the arrival of each reserved change opportunity.

In the pre-reading preview performance setting process, next, the pre-reading preview performance in progress flag area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300 is set to "1".
This will start the hold notification performance.
In addition, through processing not shown, the pre-reading preview performance flag area is set to "0" upon the end of the hold preview performance.

In step S33-8, a sound preview lottery process is executed, and the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). In the sound preview lottery process, a sound preview lottery is executed.
The control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a sound notice lottery table in which the winning value of the sound notice lottery is registered. In addition, as the sound notice lottery table, a sound notice lottery table corresponding to the case where the pre-reading notice lottery is won and a sound notice lottery table corresponding to the case where the pre-reading notice lottery is lost are stored. In each sound notice lottery table, the winning value of the sound notice lottery is registered so as to have a predetermined winning probability. In particular, when the sound notice is executed, the winning value of the sound notice lottery is registered in each sound notice lottery table so that the expectation of the hold notice performance being started is higher (for example, 70%) than when the sound notice is not executed.
In the sound prediction lottery process, first, a sound prediction lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Also, a sound prediction lottery table corresponding to the result of the pre-reading prediction lottery is read. Then, based on the obtained sound prediction lottery random number and the read sound prediction lottery table, it is determined whether or not to execute a sound prediction.
Furthermore, when it is determined that a sound preview is to be executed, the production scenario data corresponding to the sound preview is read out. Then, the read production scenario data and the production scenario timer corresponding to the production scenario data are set in the production scenario setting area. This starts the sound preview.

(Variation command reception process)
Next, the variable command receiving process in step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the variable command receiving process.
When the variable command receiving process is executed in step S32-5, the process proceeds to step S34-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not a specified control command has been received. If it is determined that the specified control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2. If it is determined that the specified control command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control commands refer to a symbol type designation command, a variation mode designation command, and a variation pattern designation command.
In step S34-2, a stop effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-3. In the stop effect determination process, a stop effect number (a mode of the stop effect) is determined.
Specifically, in the stop effect determination process, a stop effect number (a mode of the stop effect) is determined based on the type of the stop pattern specified by the pattern type designation command. Then, the determined stop effect number is stored in a stop effect number storage area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300.

In step S34-3, a variable performance determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-4. In the variable performance determination process, a variable performance number (a mode of the variable performance) is determined.
Specifically, in the variable performance determination process, first, a first half variable performance determination process is executed to determine a first half variable performance number (aspect of the first half variable performance).
The control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a first half variable performance lottery table in which the correspondence between the variable mode number (type of variable mode) and the first half variable performance number (form of first half variable performance) is registered.
In the first half variable performance determination process, first, a first half variable performance selection table is read. Then, a first half variable performance number corresponding to the variable mode number designated by the variable mode designation command is determined (selected) from among the first half variable performance numbers registered in the first half variable performance selection table.
In the variable performance determination process, next, a second half variable performance determination process is executed to determine a second half variable performance number (a mode of the second half variable performance).
The control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a second half variable performance lottery table in which the correspondence between the variable pattern number (type of variable pattern) and the second half variable performance number (mode of second half variable performance) is registered.
In the latter half variable performance determination process, first, a latter half variable performance selection table is read out. Then, a latter half variable performance number corresponding to the variable pattern number designated by the variable pattern designation command is determined (selected) from the latter half variable performance numbers registered in the latter half variable performance selection table.

In step S34-4, a preview performance determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-5. In the preview performance determination process, whether or not to execute various preview performances (main preview performance, sub preview performance, etc.) is selected, and the content of the preview performance to be executed is selected and set.

In step S34-5, a variable performance setting process is executed, and the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the variable performance setting process, performance scenario data for the variable performance is set.
Specifically, in the variable performance setting process, the performance scenario data corresponding to the first half variable performance number determined in step S34-3 and the performance scenario data corresponding to the second half variable performance number determined in step S34-3 are read out.
Next, the read-out performance scenario data is synthesized to generate performance scenario data related to the variable performance. Then, the generated performance scenario data and a performance scenario timer corresponding to the performance scenario data are set in the performance scenario setting area. This starts the variable performance.

(Stop command reception process)
Next, the stop command reception process in step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the stop command reception process.
When the stop command reception process is executed in step S32-6, the process proceeds to step S35-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not a stop command has been received. If it is determined that a stop command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2. If it is determined that a stop command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, a stop effect start process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7). In the stop effect start process, effect scenario data for the stop effect is set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, the stop effect number stored in the stop effect number storage area is acquired, and the effect scenario data corresponding to the acquired stop effect number is read out. Then, the read-out effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. This starts the stop effect (stop display of the effect patterns z1 and z2).

(Opening command reception process)
Next, the opening command receiving process in step S32-7 will be described.
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the opening command receiving process.
When the opening command reception process is executed in step S32-7, the process proceeds to step S39-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S39-1, it is determined whether or not an opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that an opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-2. If it is determined that an opening designation command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8).
In step S39-2, a winning effect setting process is executed, and the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8). In the winning effect setting process, effect scenario data for the winning effect is set.
Specifically, in the winning effect setting process, a winning effect number is selected according to the type of the stop symbol specified by the opening designation command. Also, the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected winning effect number is read out. Then, the read out effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. This starts the winning effect.

(Function of Pachinko Machine 1)
In the pachinko machine 1, when multiple types of button notices are executed at the same time, the button lamp executes an operation corresponding to the button notice with the highest notice priority among the multiple types of button notices. This prevents the button lamp from failing to execute an operation corresponding to the button notice with the highest notice priority among the multiple types of button notices, making it possible to suppress a decrease in the presentation effect.
Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, the multiple types of button previews include a first button preview (specifically, a dialogue preview/story preview) in which the effective operation period is set during one change performance (changing display of special symbols), and a second button preview (specifically, a continuous button preview) in which a longer effective operation period is set than the first button preview (the effective operation period is set during multiple change performances (changing display of special symbols)). The first button preview has a higher preview priority than the second button preview. This makes it possible to execute an operation using the button lamp by giving priority to the first button preview, which has a shorter effective operation period, over the second button preview, which has a relatively longer effective operation period.
Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 includes, as multiple types of button previews, a first button preview (specifically, a dialogue preview, a story preview, and a continuous button preview) that suggests that the operation of the effect button 5b is valid, and a second button preview (specifically, a hidden button preview) that makes it more difficult to see the effect content compared to the first button preview (does not suggest that the operation of the effect button 5b is valid). The first button preview has a higher preview priority than the second button preview. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which it is possible to determine that the second button preview is being executed based on the operation of the button lamp.
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when the transparency setting is "enabled" for a button notice with a high notice priority among the multiple types of button notices, if the effect button 5b is pressed during a period in which the valid periods of the multiple types of button notices overlap, the effect of pressing the effect button 5b can be applied to each of the multiple types of button notices. As a result, if the effect button 5b is pressed during a period in which the valid period of one button notice (a button notice with a high notice priority) among the multiple types of button notices overlaps with the valid period of the other button notice (a button notice with a low notice priority), the effect of the pressing operation can be applied to each of the multiple types of button notices. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which, for any of the multiple types of button previews, the presentation corresponding to the pressing operation of the presentation button 5b (display of the second dialogue preview image im2, display of the story end image A, display of the second stage story image im4, display of the story end image B, display of the third stage story image im5, press presentation, display of the content "ally character attacks enemy character", etc.) is not executed.
On the other hand, when the transparent setting is set to "disabled" for the button notice with a high notice priority among the multiple types of button notices, when the effect button 5b is pressed during the period in which the effective periods of the multiple types of button notices overlap, the effect of the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is applied only to the button notice with a high notice priority among the multiple types of button notices, and is not applied to the button notice with a low notice priority. As a result, when the effect button 5b is pressed during the period in which the effective period of one button notice (a button notice with a high notice priority) and the effective period of the other button notice (a button notice with a low notice priority) among the multiple types of button notices overlap, the effect of the pressing operation is applied only to one button notice (a button notice with a high notice priority) and not to the other button notice (a button notice with a low notice priority). Therefore, it is possible to emphasize the effect corresponding to the pressing operation of the effect button 5b for one button notice (a button notice with a high notice priority).

(Variation 1)
Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various modifications can be made to the above embodiment.
For example, in the above embodiment, the suggestive effects (specifically, suggestive effects A, B, and C) executed during the button preview are configured as lamp effects using button lamps. However, the suggestive effects (specifically, suggestive effects A, B, and C) executed during the button preview are not limited to lamp effects using button lamps, and may be configured with other effects (lamp effects using other lamps (light-emitting means), display effects, sound effects, movable body effects, etc.). In particular, the suggestive effects (specifically, suggestive effects A, B, and C) executed during the button preview may be configured with "lamp effects using button lamps + α" (for example, "lamp effects using button lamps + sound effects", "lamp effects using button lamps + display effects", "lamp effects using button lamps + movable body effects", etc.). Alternatively, the suggestion effects executed during the button preview (specifically, suggestion effect A, suggestion effect B, and suggestion effect C) may be composed only of lamp effects using lamps other than button lamps, or may be composed only of sound effects, or may be composed only of display effects, or may be composed only of movable body effects.

1 Pachinko machine 31 Main image display device 31a Display screen 200 Main control board 300 Performance control board B1, B2, B3 Button icon im1 First line preview image im2 Second line preview image im3 First stage story image im4 Second stage story image im5 Third stage story image im6 Battle image

Claims (1)

A performance control means for executing an operation performance;
A performance means for performing an operation corresponding to the operation performance,
When a plurality of types of operation performances are executed in a time-overlapping manner, an operation corresponding to an operation performance having a high priority among the plurality of types of operation performances can be executed by the performance means;
During the execution of the operation performance, a valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid is set,
The plurality of types of operation performances include a first operation performance and a second operation performance having a longer effective period than the first operation performance;
The first operation performance has a higher priority than the second operation performance,
During a period during which the effective period of the second operation performance and the effective period of the first operation performance overlap each other, the performance means is capable of executing an action corresponding to the first operation performance and not executing an action corresponding to the second operation performance;
The gaming machine , wherein the presentation means is a lamp, a speaker or a movable body .

Images